2018年CFA一级官方mock(中册)
pdf
keyboard_arrow_up
School
Columbia University *
*We aren’t endorsed by this school
Course
123
Subject
Finance
Date
Jan 9, 2024
Type
Pages
184
Uploaded by JudgeOryx3841
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
T
he morning session of the 2018 Level I Chartered Financial Analyst
® Mock
Examination has 120 questions. To best simulate the exam day experience, candidates are advised to allocate an average of one and a half minutes per question for a total of 180 minutes (3 hours) for this session of the exam.
Questions
Topic
Minutes
1–18
Ethical and Professional Standards
27
19–33
Quant
22.5
34–45
Econ
18
46–69
Financial Reporting and Analysis
36
70–78
Corporate Finance
13.5
79–86
Portfolio Management
12
87–98
Equity
18
99–110
Fixed Income
18
111–115
Derivatives
7.5
116–120
Alternative Investments
7.5
Total:
180
By accessing this mock exam, you agree to the following terms of use: This mock exam is provided to currently registered CFA candidates. Candidates may view and print the exam for personal exam prepara-
tion only. The following activities are strictly prohibited and may result in disciplinary and/or legal action: accessing or permitting access by anyone other than currently-registered CFA candidates; copying, posting to any website, emailing, distributing and/or reprinting the mock exam for any purpose
© 2017 CFA Institute. All rights reserved.
2
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
2018 LEVEL I MOCK EXAM (B) AM
1
Justin Blake, CFA, a retired portfolio manager, owns 20,000 shares of a small public company that he would like to sell because he is worried about the com-
pany’s prospects. He posts messages on several internet bulletin boards. The messages read, “This stock is going up once the pending patents are released, so now is the time to buy. The stock is a buy at anything below $3. I have done some close research on these guys.” According to the Standards of Practice Handbook
, Blake most likely violated the Standard or Standards associated with: A
Integrity of Capital Markets and Conflicts of Interest. B
Integrity of Capital Markets, but not Conflicts of Interest. C
Neither Integrity of Capital Markets nor Conflicts of Interest. 2
According to the CFA Institute Code of Ethics and Standards of Professional Conduct, trading on material nonpublic information is least likely to be pre-
vented by establishing: A
firewalls. B
selective disclosure. C
personal trading limitations.
3
Jefferson Piedmont, CFA, a portfolio manager for Park Investments, plans to manage the portfolios of several family members in exchange for a percentage of each portfolio’s profits. As his family members have extensive portfolios requiring substantial attention, they have requested that Piedmont provide the services outside his employment with Park. Piedmont notifies his employer in writing of his prospective outside employment. Two weeks later, Piedmont begins managing the family members’ portfolios. By managing these portfolios, which of the following CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct has Piedmont violated? A
Conflicts of Interest
B
Additional Compensation C
Both Additional Compensation and Conflicts of Interest 4
Noor Mawar, CFA, manages a trust fund with the beneficiary being an orphaned 18-year-old student. The investment policy dictates that trust assets are expected to provide the student with a stable low-risk source of income until she reaches the age of 30 years. Based on information from an Internet blog, the student asks Mawar to invest in a new business venture that she expects will provide high returns over the next five years. Mawar ignores the request, instead securing conservative investments to provide sufficient income. Did Mawar most likely
violate the CFA Institute Code of Ethics and Standards of Professional Conduct?
A
Yes.
B
No, because the client’s objectives were met.
C
No, because the investment time frame does not match the investment horizon.
5
After a firm presents a minimum required number of years of GIPS-compliant performance, the firm must present an additional year of performance each year, building up to a minimum of: A
10 years of GIPS-compliant performance.
B
5 years of GIPS-compliant performance.
3
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
C
15 years of GIPS-compliant performance. 6
In the event of a discrepancy between the official GIPS standards and the local language translation, the official governing language is: A
English.
B
the language of the local country.
C
the language of a neutral country.
7
Disclosure of confidential CFA exam information will most likely
be detected by the Professional Conduct staff through:
A
monitoring online and social media.
B
analysis of Proctor Reports.
C
annual Professional Conduct Statements.
8
When making performance presentations to prospective clients, a GIPS
compli-
ant firm should least likely
do which of the following? A
Selectively report its top fund performance
B
Include the fund performance of former clients
C
Report performance history for all market cycles under review
9
A central bank fines a commercial bank it supervises for not following statutory regulations regarding non-performing loan provisions on three large loans as a result of the bank’s loan provisioning policy. Louis Marie Buffet, CFA, sits on the Board of Directors of the commercial bank as a non-executive director, representing minority shareholders. He also chairs the internal audit committee of the bank that determines the loan provisioning policy of the bank. Mercy Gatabaki, CFA, is the bank’s external auditor and follows international auditing standards whereby she tests the loan portfolio by randomly selecting loans to check for compliance in all aspects of central bank regulations. Which charter-
holder is most likely in violation of the Code and Standard? A
Both. B
Buffet. C
Gatabaki. 10
Diana Fairbanks, CFA, is married to an auditor who is employed at a large accounting firm. When her husband mentions that a computer firm he audits will receive a qualified opinion she thinks nothing of it. Later that week when she reviews a new client account she notices that there are substantial holdings of this computer firm. When she does a thorough internet search for news on the company, she does not find anything about its most recent audit or any other adverse information. Which of the following actions concerning the computer stock should Fairbanks most likely take to avoid violating the CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct?
A
Take no investment action.
B
Complete a thorough and diligent analysis of the company and then sell the stock. C
Sell the stock immediately as she has a reasonable basis for taking this investment action.
11
Sherry Buckner, CFA, manages equity accounts for government entities whose portfolios are classified as being conservative and risk averse. Since the objec-
tive of her clients is to maximize returns with the lowest possible risk, Buckner considers adding to their holdings a new, thinly traded, leveraged derivative product that she believes has the potential for high returns. To make her invest-
ment decision, Buckner relies upon comprehensive research from an investment
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
4
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
bank with a solid reputation for top quality research. After her review of that research, Buckner positions her accounts so each has a 10% allocation to the derivative product. Did Buckner most likely violate any CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct by purchasing the derivative product for her clients?
A
No.
B
Yes, related to Suitability.
C
Yes, related to Loyalty, Prudence, and Care. 12
Which of the following is least
likely
part of the CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct, Standard V(B)–Communication with Clients and Prospective Clients? Members and candidates must:
A
make reasonable efforts to ensure that when communicating investment performance information it is fair, accurate, and complete.
B
disclose to clients and prospective clients significant limitations and risks associated with the investment process. C
distinguish between fact and opinion in the presentation of investment anal-
ysis and recommendations. 13
Jack Steyn, CFA, recently became the head of the trading desk at a large investment management firm that specializes in domestic equities. While reviewing the firm’s trading operations he notices that clients give discretion to the manager to select brokers on the basis of their overall services to the management firm. Despite the client directive, Steyn would most likely
violate Standard III(A)–Loyalty, Prudence, and Care if he pays soft commissions for which of the following services from the brokers?
A
Equity research reports
B
Investment conference attendance
C
Database services for offshore investments 14
Henrietta Huerta, CFA, writes a weekly investment newsletter to market her services and obtain new asset management clients. A third party distributes the free newsletter on her behalf to those individuals on its mailing list. As a result, it is widely read by thousands of individual investors. The newsletter recom-
mendations reflect most of Huerta’s investment actions. After completing fur-
ther research on East-West Coffee Roasters, Huerta decides to change her initial buy recommendation to a sell. To avoid violating the CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct it would be most appropriate for Huerta to distribute the new investment recommendation to: A
newsletter recipients first.
B
asset management clients first.
C
newsletter recipients and asset management clients simultaneously.
15
Wouter Duyck, CFA, is the sole proprietor of an investment advisory firm serving several hundred middle class retail clients. Duyck claims to be different from his competitors because he conducts research himself. He discloses that to simplify the management of all these accounts he has created a recommended list of stocks, from which he selects investments for all of his clients based on their suitability. Duyck’s recommended list of stocks is obtained from his pri-
mary broker, who has completed due diligence on each stock. Duyck’s recom-
mended list least likely
violates which of the following CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct? A
Fair Dealing.
B
Misrepresentation.
5
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
C
Diligence and Reasonable Basis.
16
Heidi Halvorson, CFA, is the Chief Investment Officer for Tukwila Investors, an asset management firm specializing in fixed-income investments. Tukwila is in danger of losing one of its largest clients, Quinault Jewelers, which accounts for nearly one third of its revenues. Quinault recently told Halverson that Tukwila would be fired unless the performance of Quinault’s portfolio improves sig-
nificantly. Shortly after this conversation, Halvorson purchases two corporate bonds she believes are suitable for any of her clients based upon third party research from a reliable and diligent source. Immediately after the purchase, one bond increases significantly in price while the other bond declines sig-
nificantly. At the end of the day, Halvorson allocates the profitable bond trade to Quinault and the other bond to two of her largest institutional accounts. Halvorson most likely
violated the CFA Institute Standards of Professional with regards to:
A
client suitability.
B
trade allocations.
C
third party research.
17
Alan Quanta, CFA, provides credit rating analysis of high-yield bonds using external credit ratings as a foundation. At the end of the last quarter, Quanta’s firm, North Investment Bank, held a large position in the bonds of Veyron Corporation, a real estate company with all of its land holdings in a country recently downgraded by several credit rating agencies. The downgrades made Veyron bonds extremely difficult to sell because the bond price has dropped every day since the downgrades. Quanta has been asked by his supervisor to contact the firm’s institutional clients to convince them Veyron bonds are still an attractive purchase, especially at these lower prices. Quanta does not con-
sider the Veyron bonds a buy at this price level. According to the CFA Institute Code of Ethics and Standards of Professional Conduct, the most appropriate
action for Quanta is to:
A
obey his supervisor’s request.
B
ignore his supervisor’s request.
C
promote the bonds with appropriate disclosures.
18
A large manufacturing company is seeking help finding a fund manager for its pension plan. After a comprehensive but unsuccessful search, Brett Arun, CFA, is hired to solicit proposals from various fund managers. The client pays Arun a lump sum fee for his services. The search concludes with Ramport Investments being hired as the pension plan’s manager. A year after Ramport is hired, the pension administrator sends Arun a letter telling him how satisfied the pension trustees are with the services provided by the fund manager. Subsequently, without the plan sponsor’s knowledge, Arun receives a payment from Ramport for successfully introducing it to the pension plan under an agreement Arun entered into with Ramport when the initial contact with the fund manager was made. With regard to the payment received, did Arun most likely
violate the CFA Institute Code of Ethics and Standards of Professional Conduct?
A
No.
B
Yes, because he did not disclose the referral fee to the client.
C
Yes, because he should have refused payment from the fund manager.
6
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
19
An individual wants to be able to spend €80,000 per year for an anticipated 25 years in retirement. To fund this retirement account, he will make annual deposits of €6,608 at the end of each of his working years. He can earn 6% com-
pounded annually on all investments. The minimum number of deposits that are needed to reach his retirement goal is closest
to:
A
51.
B
40.
C
28.
20
A company has an unsecured line of credit and needs to maintain its EBIT- to-interest coverage ratio greater than 2.0. Its EBIT is estimated to be between $36 million and $48 million, with all values equally likely. If the forecasted interest charge for the year is $20 million, the probability that EBIT/interest will be more than 2.0 is closest
to:
A
61.5%.
B
33.3%.
C
66.7%.
21
A small-cap growth fund’s monthly returns for the past 36 months have been consistently outperforming its benchmark. An analyst is determining whether the standard deviation of monthly returns is greater than 6%. Which of the following best
describes the hypothesis to be tested?
A
H
0
: σ
2
≤ 0.36%
B
H
a
: σ
2
> 6%
C
H
0
: σ
2
≥ 0.36%
22
The variance of returns of Asset A is 625. The variance of returns of Asset B is 1,225. The covariance of returns between Asset A and Asset B is 600. The cor-
relation of returns between Asset A and Asset B is closest
to:
A
0.29.
B
0.69.
C
0.47.
23
The central limit theorem is best described as stating that the sampling distribu-
tion of the sample mean will be approximately normal for large-size samples:
A
if the population distribution is normal.
B
for populations described by any probability distribution.
C
if the population distribution is symmetrical.
24
Technical analysts most likely
study trends and patterns in security prices to forecast a company’s:
A
future price trends.
B
earnings potential.
C
intrinsic value.
25
Given a large random sample, which of the following types of data are
least
appropriately analyzed with nonparametric tests?
A
Signed data (e.g., number of positives and negatives)
B
Ranked data (e.g., 1st, 3rd)
C
Numerical values (e.g., 28.43, 79.11)
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
7
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
26
A group of fund analysts have to select the first, second, and third best fund manager of the year for 2012 based on their subjective judgment. If 10 fund managers are candidates for the three awards, the number of ways in which each analyst can make his ranking is closest
to:
A
30.
B
720.
C
120.
27
The bond-equivalent yield for a semi-annual pay bond is most likely
:
A
equal to the effective annual yield.
B
equal to double the semi-annual yield to maturity.
C
more than the effective annual yield.
28
An analyst gathers the following information about the performance of a port-
folio ($ millions):
Quarter
Value at Beginning of Quarter (Prior to Inflow or Outflow)
Cash Inflow (Outflow) at Beginning of Quarter
Value at End of Quarter
1
2.0
0.2
2.4
2
2.4
0.4
2.6
3
2.6
(0.2)
3.2
4
3.2
1.0
4.1
The portfolio’s annual time-weighted rate of return is closest
to:
A
8%.
B
32%.
C
27%.
29
The joint probability of events A
and B
is 32%, with the probability of event A
being 60% and the probability of event B
being 50%. On the basis of this information, the conditional probability of event A
given that event B
occurs is closest to
:
A
53.3%.
B
30.0%.
C
64.0%.
30
If the stated annual interest rate is 20% and the frequency of compounding is monthly, the effective annual rate (EAR) is closest to:
A
20%.
B
21%.
C
22%.
31
The following 10 observations are a sample drawn from a normal population: 25, 20, 18, –5, 35, 21, –11, 8, 20, and 9. The mean of the sample is closest to:
A
17.20.
B
14.00.
C
15.56.
32
A subset of a population is
best described as a:
A
statistic.
B
sample.
C
conditional distribution.
8
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
33
If the price of a stock goes from $15.00 to $16.20 in one year, the continuously compounded rate of return is closest
to:
A
7.70%.
B
8.33%.
C
8.00%.
34
The price of a good falls from $15 to $13. Given this decline in price, the quan-
tity demanded of the good rises from 100 units to 120 units. The own-price elasticity of demand for the good is closest to:
A
–0.67.
B
–1.50.
C
–1.25.
35
Three firms operate under perfect competition, producing 900 units of the same product but using different production technologies. Each company’s cost structure is indicated in the table:
Company
X
Y
Z
Total Variable Costs
$2,700
$3,600
$4,500
Total Fixed Costs
2,700
1,800
900
Total Costs
$5,400
$5,400
$5,400
Which of the following statements is most
accurate? If the unit selling price is:
A
$6.00, all firms should exit the market in the long run.
B
$4.50, all firms should continue to operate in the short run, but exit the market in the long run if these conditions are expected to persist.
C
3.00, Firm X should continue to operate in the short run, but Firms Y and Z should shut down production.
36
In a country with a high level of income, as domestic income rises, it is most likely
that an increase will occur in:
A
the fiscal balance.
B
private saving and investment.
C
the trade balance.
37
In order to reduce a trade deficit, the government of a country experiencing full employment moves to depreciate its currency. As a result, if the country’s domestic spending declines relative to income, the most likely
mechanism that causes this to occur is the:
A
income effect.
B
wealth effect.
C
substitution effect.
38
Which characteristic is a firm least likely
to exhibit when it operates in a market with a downward sloping demand curve, many competitors, and zero economic profits in the long run?
A
No pricing power
B
Low barriers to entry
C
Differentiated product
39
Cost–push inflation is least likely to be affected by an increase in:
A
employee wages.
B
finished goods prices.
9
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
C
commodity prices.
40
The following information is available for 2011:
New Zealand
Canada
Jan 1
Dec 31
Jan 1
Dec 31
Price index
1,137
1,158
117.8
119.9
Nominal exchange rate: NZD/CAD
1.2844
1.2589
The change in the real exchange rate (in NZD/CAD terms) is closest
to:
A
–2.05%.
B
–1.92%.
C
+1.96%.
41
Assume that the central bank reduces the reserve requirement. The most likely
effect will be:
A
a decrease in the money supply.
B
a decrease in new deposits.
C
an increase in the money multiplier.
42
Assuming its trading partner does not retaliate, which of the following condi-
tions must
hold in order for a large country to increase its national welfare by imposing a tariff?
A
The deadweight loss must be smaller than the benefit of its improving terms of trade.
B
It must auction the import licenses for a fee to offset the decline in the con-
sumer surplus.
C
It must have a comparative advantage in the production of the imported good.
43
A dealer report includes the following exchange rate details:
Spot Rate
Expected Change over Next Year
USD/EUR
1.30
1.75%
CAD/USD
0.95
–0.25%
CHF/EUR
1.22
0.75%
The expected CAD/CHF cross rate in one year is closest to
:
A
1.04.
B
0.98.
C
1.02.
44
Higher than expected inflation will most likely
lead to an increase in:
A
the real wealth of borrowers.
B
investment.
C
the information content of market prices for economic agents.
45
The structural deficit is equal to the budget deficit:
A
adjusted for inflation.
B
that would exist at full employment.
C
excluding the impact of automatic stabilizers.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
10
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
46
All else being equal, if the purchase price of inventory is increasing, a company that accounts for its inventory under last-in, first-out (LIFO) instead of first-in, first-out (FIFO) is most likely
to have a:
A
higher debt-to-equity ratio.
B
lower net cash flow from operating activities.
C
lower market valuation of its common equity.
47
Which of the following best describes common equity?
A
The initial investment by common shareholders in the company
B
The resources owned or controlled by a company
C
The residual interest in a company’s assets after deducting its liabilities
48
The cumulative amount of earnings recognized on a company’s income state-
ments that have not been distributed as dividends to the company’s owners is best
described as:
A
retained earnings.
B
accumulated other comprehensive income.
C
dividends payable.
49
Income statements for two companies (A and B) and the common-size income statement for the industry are provided in the following table:
($ thousands)
Company A
Company B
Industry
Sales
$10,500
$8,250
100.0%
Cost of goods sold
6,353
5,239
62.8%
Selling, general, and administra-
tive expenses
2,625
2,021
24.8%
Interest expense
840
536
7.0%
Pretax earnings
683
454
5.4%
Taxes
205
145
1.7%
Net earnings
$478
$309
3.7%
The best
conclusion an analyst can make is that:
A
Company A earns a higher gross margin than both Company B and the industry.
B
both companies’ tax rates are higher than the industry average.
C
Company B’s interest rate is lower than the industry average.
50
The following selected balance sheet and ratio data are available for a company:
Metric
Current Year
Previous Year
Cash and cash equivalents
98.0
Marketable securities
389.2
Accounts receivables
12.0
Other current assets
120.1
Total current assets
619.3
Deferred revenues
85.0
Other current liabilities
92.3
Total current liabilities
177.3
11
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
Metric
Current Year
Previous Year
Cash ratio
2.37
Quick ratio
2.97
Current ratio
3.27
Which of the following ratios most likely decreased this year?
A
Quick
B
Current
C
Cash
51
The following items are from a company’s cash flow statement.
Classification of Cash Flow
Description
Amount (£ thousands)
Operating activities
Cash received from customers
55,000
Investing activities
Interest and dividends received
10,000
Financing activities
Net repayment of revolving credit loan
12,000
Which of the following standards and formats did the company most likely
use in the preparation of its financial statements?
A
Either IFRS or US GAAP, direct format
B
IFRS, indirect format
C
IFRS, direct format
52
If a company capitalizes an expenditure related to capital assets instead of expensing it, ignoring taxes, the company will most likely
report:
A
a lower cash flow per share in that period.
B
the same free cash flow to the firm (FCFF) in that period.
C
a higher earnings per share in future periods.
53
A company has recently revalued one of its depreciable properties and esti-
mates that its remaining useful life will be another 20 years. The applicable tax rate for all years is 30%, and the revaluation of the property is not recognized for tax purposes. Details related to this asset are provided in the following table:
Original Values and Estimates (millions)
Accounting Purposes
Tax Purposes
Acquisition cost in 2011
£8,000
£8,000
Depreciation, straight line
20 years
8 years
Accumulated depreciation, end of 2013
£1,200
£3,000
Net balance, end of 2013
£6,800
£5,000
Re-estimated Values and Estimates, Start of 2014
Revaluation balance, start of 2014
£10,000
Not applicable
New estimated life
20 years
The deferred tax liability related to this asset (in millions) as at the end of 2014 is closest to:
A
£960.
B
£690.
C
£1,650.
12
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
54
The year-end balances in a company’s last-in, first-out (LIFO) reserve are $56.8 million as reported in the company’s financial statements for both 2013 and 2014. For 2014, the measure that will most likely be the same regardless of whether the company uses the LIFO or the first-in, first-out (FIFO) inventory method is the:
A
gross profit margin.
B
amount of working capital.
C
inventory turnover.
55
The following selected fixed asset information is available for a company:
2016 ($US millions)
Cost: Total property, plant, and equipment (PP&E)
30,815
Accumulated depreciation
16,465
Net PP&E
14,350
Average net PP&E
12,200
Net sales
21,670
Net income
2,705
The company’s fixed asset turnover ratio is
closest
to:
A
1.78.
B
8.01.
C
1.51.
56
Which of the following ratios is most likely
to be used as a measure of operating performance?
A
Cash ratio
B
Working capital turnover ratio
C
Defensive interval ratio
57
The following information is available about a company ($ millions):
Year Ended 31 December
2012
2011
Sales
322.8
320.1
Net income
27.2
26.8
Cash flow from operations
15.3
38.1
During 2012, the company most likely
experienced a significant decrease in:
A
inventory, anticipating lower demand for its products in 2013.
B
the proportion of sales made on a cash basis.
C
the proportion of interest-bearing debt relative to trade accounts payable.
58
Selected information from a company’s recent income statement and balance sheets is presented in the following table.
Selected Financial Information as of 31 December
(C$ thousands)
2013
2012
Sales
2,240,000
Cost of goods sold (COGS)
1,320,000
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
13
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
(C$ thousands)
2013
2012
Cash and investments
210,700
191,600
Accounts receivable
212,800
201,900
Inventories
63,000
71,500
Accounts payable
129,600
157,200
Other current liabilities
130,700
182,700
The company operates in an industry in which suppliers offer terms of 2/10, net 30. The payables turnover for the average company in the industry is 8.5 times.
Which of the following statements is most
accurate? In 2013, the company, on
average:
A
paid its accounts within the payment terms provided.
B
paid its accounts more promptly than the average firm in the industry.
C
took advantage of early payment discounts.
59
The following information is available on a company:
Metric Fixed charge coverage ratio required by debt covenant
3.50
Forecasted interest expense ($ thousands)
800
Forecasted lease payments ($ thousands)
300
Tax rate
30%
The minimum net income (in thousands) that the company must generate to meet its debt covenant requirement is closest
to:
A
$2,750.
B
$1,925.
C
$2,135.
60
Which of the following
best describes a reason a company would acquire the use of equipment through an operating lease rather than by purchase?
A
To take advantage of less costly financing
B
To obtain preferential tax treatment for the lease payments compared with ownership
C
To increase cash from operations
61
An analyst examining the statement of cash flows for possible manipulation is least likely
to be concerned about a(n):
A
cash flow from operations to net income ratio consistently higher than 1.
B
increase in cash from operations arising from a large change in accounts payable.
C
change in the classification of interest paid from an operating cash flow to a financing cash flow.
(Continued)
14
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
62
A company that prepares its financial statements in accordance with IFRS issues £5,000,000 face value 10-year bonds on 1 January 2013 when market interest rates for such bonds are 5.50%. The bonds carry a coupon of 6.50% with interest paid annually on 31 December. The carrying value of the bonds as of 31 December 2014 will be closest
to:
A
£5,316,000.
B
£4,695,000.
C
£5,301,000.
63
Under the International Accounting Standards Board’s (IASB’s) Conceptual Framework, one of the qualitative characteristics of useful financial information is that different knowledgeable users would agree that the information is a faith-
ful representation of the economic events that it is intended to represent. This characteristic is best
described as:
A
understandability.
B
verifiability.
C
comparability.
64
The following information about a company is provided:
Account
$ thousands
Contributed capital, beginning of the year
50
Retained earnings, beginning of the year
225
Sales revenues earned during the year
450
Investment income earned during the year
5
Total expenses paid during the year
402
Dividends paid during the year
10
Total assets, end of the year
800
Total liabilities (in $ thousands) at the end of the year are closest to:
A
482.
B
487.
C
472.
65
Common-size income statements are shown for three companies in the same industry. Which company is most likely
to have a technically superior product?
Company X
Company Y
Company Z
Revenue
100%
100%
100%
Cost of goods sold
65
50
30
Administrative expenses
20
20
20
Research and development
0
5
30
Advertising expenses
5
15
10
Operating profit
10
10
10
A
Company Z
B
Company Y
C
Company X
66
Management’s commentary (also known as management’s discussion and analy-
sis) most likely includes:
15
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
A
supplementary information about accounting policies, methods, and estimates.
B
an auditor’s opinion as to the fair presentation of the financial statements.
C
a discussion of significant trends, events, and uncertainties that affect the operating results.
67
A US company that complies with US GAAP would like to exclude some items in determining non-GAAP financial measures, other than EBIT and EBITDA. Which of the following items may be excluded?
A
For performance measures, items tagged as infrequent that occurred within the past two years
B
Impairment charges for long-lived assets
C
For liquidity measures, litigation costs requiring cash settlement
68
Which of the following conditions is most likely
associated with decreased earn-
ings quality? Compared with the prior year, the reporting entity’s earnings:
A
decreased slightly in response to the introduction of conservative account-
ing policies.
B
were similar in magnitude but included a large gain on the sale of a manu-
facturing plant.
C
increased slightly because of a reduction in bad debt expense based on more-current experiences.
69
An analyst is comparing the financial leverage of two companies, A and B, from the same industry.
●
Both companies can borrow at a rate of 4%.
●
The two companies are virtually identical except that Company A leases
essentially all of its premises; Company B owns all of its premises.
●
Company A recorded €15,280 (thousand) of lease expenses in 2015, the cur-
rent year, ending 31 December. The following excerpt is from the notes to its
2015 financial statements:
Note on Leasing Activities: Non-Cancellable Operating Lease Rentals Are Payable on 1 January as Follows:
€ thousands
2016
15,280
2017
15,280
2018
15,280
To facilitate a fair comparison with Company B, the analyst will most likely
adjust (in € thousands) for the operating leases by increasing Company A’s:
A
earnings before tax by €15,280.
B
liabilities by €45,840.
C
liabilities by €44,100.
70
The following information is available for a firm:
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
16
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
Market risk premium
7.0%
Risk-free rate
2.0%
Comparable firm return
10.4%
Comparable firm debt-to-equity ratio
1.0
Comparable firm tax rate
40.0%
The firm’s unleveraged beta is closest
to:
A
0.75.
B
1.20.
C
1.05.
71
The acceptance of which of the following capital budgeting projects is most likely
to expose a company to the highest level of uncertainty?
A
Replacement of worn out equipment
B
Expansion projects
C
Newly launched product or services
72
The optimal capital budget for a firm is best described as occurring when the company’s marginal cost of capital is:
A
equal to the investment opportunity schedule.
B
less than the investment opportunity schedule.
C
greater than the investment opportunity schedule.
73
Financial risk is
least likely
affected by:
A
debentures.
B
dividends.
C
long-term leases.
74
Which of the following is the least
appropriate method for an external analyst to use to estimate a company’s target capital structure for determining the weighted average cost of capital (WACC)?
A
Using the company’s current capital structure at book value weights
B
Using averages of comparable companies’ capital structure
C
Using statements made by the company’s management regarding capital structure policy
75
Which is most likely
considered a secondary source of liquidity?
A
Centralized cash management system
B
Trade credit
C
Liquidating long-term assets
76
Under the stakeholder theory, corporate governance is most consistent with a system of:
A
internal controls and procedures by which individual companies are managed.
B
defined roles for management and the majority shareowner(s).
C
checks and balances to minimize the conflicting interests among shareowners.
77
Two mutually exclusive projects have the following cash flows (€) and internal rates of return (IRR):
17
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
Project
IRR
Year 0
Year 1
Year 2
Year 3
Year 4
A
27.97%
–2,450
345
849
635
3,645
B
28.37%
–2,450
345
849
1,051
3,175
Assuming a discount rate of 8% annually for both projects, the best decision for the firm to make is to accept:
A
both projects.
B
Project B only.
C
Project A only.
78
An investment strategy that focuses on climate change is most likely
following which approach to environmental, social, and governance (ESG) investing?
A
Thematic
B
Best in class
C
Impact
79
An investment policy statement’s risk objective states that over a 12- month period, with a probability of 95%, the client’s portfolio must not lose more than 5% of its value. This statement is most likely a(n):
A
total risk objective.
B
relative risk objective.
C
absolute risk objective.
80
The top level of a risk management system most likely is:
A
risk governance.
B
strategic analysis or integration.
C
defined policies or procedures.
81
An investor’s transactions in a mutual fund and the fund’s returns over a four- year period are provided in the following table:
Year
1
2
3
4
New investment at the beginning of the year (US$)
2,500
1,500
1,000
0
Investment return for the year
–20%
65%
–25%
10%
Withdrawal by investor at the end of the year (US$)
0
–500
–500
0
Based on this data, the money-weighted return (or internal rate of return) for the investor is closest
to:
A
2.15%.
B
7.50%.
C
3.96%.
82
Risk that can be attributed to factor(s) that affect a company or industry is best
described as:
A
non-systematic risk.
B
market risk.
C
systematic risk.
83
As one moves to the right along an investor’s efficient frontier, a set increase in risk is most likely to lead to:
18
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
A
sequentially smaller increases in expected return.
B
consistent increases in expected return.
C
sequentially larger increases in expected return.
84
Information about a portfolio that consists of two assets is provided below:
Asset
Portfolio Weight
Standard Deviation
A
25%
12%
B
75%
16%
If the correlation coefficient between the two assets is 0.75, the standard devia-
tion of the portfolio is closest
to:
A
15.00%.
B
12.37%.
C
14.39%.
85
In general, which of the following institutions will most likely
have a high need for liquidity and a short investment time horizon?
A
Banks
B
Defined-benefit pension plans
C
Endowments
86
If the expected return on the market portfolio is 6% and the risk-free rate is 2%, the expected return of a security with a beta of 1.25 is closest
to:
A
7.00%.
B
5.00%.
C
9.50%.
87
If the following three stocks are held in a portfolio, the portfolio’s total return on an equal-weighted basis is closest
to:
Stock
Number of Shares Owned
Beginning of Period Price per Share ($)
End of Period Price per Share ($)
Dividend per Share during the Period ($)
A
500
40
37
2.00
B
320
50
52
1.50
C
800
30
34
0.00
A
3.28%.
B
5.94%.
C
6.37%.
88
If the number of financial analysts who follow or analyze a company increases substantially, then the market for this company’s shares will most likely
become:
A
more attractive for active investors.
B
overvalued.
C
more efficient.
89
A corporate manager pursuing a low-cost strategy will most likely
:
A
engage in offering products of unique quality or type.
B
have strong market research teams for product development and marketing.
C
invest in productivity-improving capital equipment.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
19
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
90
For a US investor, which of the following statements concerning investing in depository receipts (DRs) is least accurate?
A
Investing in DRs could provide arbitrage opportunities and entail currency risk.
B
Investors in unsponsored DRs would have the same voting rights as the direct owners of common shares.
C
Sponsored DRs are subject to greater reporting requirements than unspon-
sored DRs.
91
Industry analysis is least
useful to those who are engaged in:
A
a top-down investment approach.
B
indexing and passive investing strategies.
C
portfolio performance attribution.
92
Which of the following statements about the forms of market efficiency is least
accurate? If the form of market efficiency is:
A
weak, then investment strategies based on fundamental analysis could achieve abnormal returns.
B
semi-strong, then security prices fully reflect all past market data.
C
strong, then prices reflect only private information.
93
An investor borrows the maximum amount allowed by the initial margin requirement of 40% to purchase 100 shares of a stock selling at $60 per share. If the investor sells the stock when its price increases to $70 per share, her return before commissions and interest will be
closest
to:
A
41.7%.
B
27.8%.
C
16.7%.
94
The following market information relates to a company:
Market price per share
$37.80
Number of shares outstanding
1,000,000
Net income
$5,250,000
Total common equity
$35,000,000
Total annual dividend paid
$1,512,000
Risk-free rate
2.60%
Market risk premium
8.00%
Beta
1.05
Using the capital asset pricing model (CAPM), the company’s cost of equity is closest to:
A
15.0%.
B
12.4%.
C
11.0%.
95
Which of the following statements about peer groups is most accurate? A peer group is constructed through a process:
A
that starts with an existing commercially classified system that is then narrowed.
B
that locates a group of companies whose valuation is influenced by diverse factors.
20
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
C
where management should refrain from participating to maintain objectivity in the process.
96
Assume the current dividend of a security is $9.50. The dividend is expected to grow by 12% each year for two years and then 3% afterwards. The required rate of return is 15%. The security’s value is closest to:
A
$95.58.
B
$120.51.
C
$94.99.
97
Which of the following best describes an advantage of the EV/EBITDA multiple for valuing equity? An advantage is that:
A
the multiple must be positive.
B
it does not require the market value of debt.
C
EBITDA is a proxy for operating cash flow.
98
Which of the following transactions is most likely to affect a company’s financial leverage ratio?
A
Payment of a 9% stock dividend
B
An increase in cash dividends paid
C
Completion of a previously announced 1-for-20 reverse stock split
99
Credit spreads are most likely
to narrow during:
A
economic contractions.
B
a period of flight to quality.
C
economic expansions.
100
Which of the following is least likely
a short-term funding method available to banks?
A
Central bank funds
B
Negotiable certificate of deposits
C
Syndicated loans
101
In the securitization process, which of the following is most likely
a third party to the transaction? The:
A
seller of the collateral.
B
special purpose entity.
C
financial guarantor.
102
Consider bonds that have the same yield to maturity and maturity. The bond with the greatest reinvestment risk is most likely the one selling at:
A
a premium.
B
par.
C
a discount.
103
On 15 December 2013, Alpha Corp. issued a 10-year callable bond paying an annual coupon of 8%. The bond is callable in whole or in part at any time after 15 December 2018. This type of callable bond is most likely referred to as:
A
American style.
B
European style.
C
Bermuda style.
104
In a rising interest rate environment, the effective duration of a putable bond relative to an otherwise identical non-putable bond, will most likely
be:
A
higher.
21
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
B
lower.
C
the same.
105
Which of the following is least likely
to be a negative covenant associated with a coupon-paying corporate bond issue?
A
A requirement to pay withholding taxes to foreign governments in a timely manner
B
A prohibition from investing in long-term projects in emerging market countries
C
A requirement to hedge at least 50% of the firm’s revenues generated from foreign sales
106
The bonds of Apex Corporations have a par value of $10,000 each and an annual required rate of return of 10%. The bonds make quarterly coupon pay-
ments at an annual rate of 6% and have two years remaining until maturity. The current market price of each bond is closest
to:
A
$10,749.
B
$9,283.
C
$9,306.
107
Which type of fixed-income security is most likely
to have coupon payments that reset periodically?
A
Callable bonds
B
Floating-rate notes
C
Convertible bonds
108
The semiannual bond equivalent yield spot rates for US Treasury yields are provided below.
Period
Years
Spot Rate
1
0.5
1.20%
2
1.0
2.10%
3
1.5
2.80%
4
2.0
3.30%
On a semiannual bond equivalent yield (BEY) basis, the six-month forward rate one year from now is closest to
:
A
4.21%.
B
3.64%.
C
2.10%.
109
Treasury spot rates on a semiannual bond equivalent yield basis are provided below.
Maturity
Semiannual Bond Equivalent Yield
0.5 years
0.40%
1.0 years
0.80%
1.5 years
1.00%
2.0 years
1.10%
2.5 years
1.20%
Using these spot rates, the value of a 2.5-year Treasury security that makes semiannual payments based on a 2% coupon rate is closest to
:
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
22
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
A
101.98.
B
106.88.
C
99.06.
110
A bond’s duration is 7.31, and its convexity is –24.85. Using the duration model with convexity adjustment, the bond’s percentage change in price if interest rates decrease 2% is closest to
:
A
15.12%.
B
15.60%.
C
14.12%.
111
For a forward contract with a value of zero, a situation where the spot price is above the forward price is best
explained by high:
A
interest rates.
B
storage costs.
C
convenience yield.
112
According to put–call–forward parity, if the put in a protective put with for-
ward contract expires out of the money, the payoff is most likely
equal to:
A
the market value of the underlying asset.
B
zero.
C
the face value of a risk-free bond.
113
A derivative can best be described as a financial instrument that:
A
duplicates the underlying asset’s performance.
B
transforms the underlying asset’s performance.
C
passes through the underlying asset’s returns.
114
In a credit default swap, the party that receives a series of cash payments in return for promising to pay compensation for credit losses resulting from a third party’s default is most likely
the:
A
clearinghouse.
B
seller of the swap.
C
buyer of the swap.
115
A swap that involves the exchange of a fixed payment for a floating payment is most likely
equivalent to a series of:
A
off-market forward contracts.
B
forward contracts that all have an initial positive value.
C
forward contracts that all have an initial value equal to the fixed payment.
116
Which of the following most likely
belongs in an alternative asset category?
A
A limited partnership that takes long and short positions in publicly traded equity.
B
Equity in an emerging market company that is traded over-the-counter.
C
Securitized commercial real estate debt.
117
High Plains Capital is a hedge fund with a portfolio valued at $475,000,000 at the beginning of the year. One year later, the value of assets under management is $541,500,000. The hedge fund charges a 1.5% management fee based on the end-of-year portfolio value as well as a 10% incentive fee. If the incentive fee and management fee are calculated independently, the effective return for a hedge fund investor is closest
to:
A
12.29%.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
23
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
B
10.89%.
C
11.06%.
118
Collectibles are least likely
to provide:
A
long-term capital appreciation.
B
portfolio diversification.
C
current income.
119
Which of the following hedge fund strategies emphasizes a top- down approach?
A
Macro
B
Equity hedge
C
Event-driven
120
A hedge fund with $225 million of initial capital charges a management fee of 1% and an incentive fee of 10%. The management fee is based on assets under management at year-end, and the incentive fee is calculated independently from the management fee. Assuming the fund earns a 15% return at year-end, total fees earned by the hedge fund during the year are closest to:
A
$5.96 million.
B
$5.70 million.
C
$5.63 million.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
T
he morning session of the 2018 Level I Chartered Financial Analyst
® Mock
Examination has 120 questions. To best simulate the exam day experience, candidates are advised to allocate an average of one and a half minutes per question for a total of 180 minutes (3 hours) for this session of the exam.
Questions
Topic
Minutes
1–18
Ethical and Professional Standards
27
19–33
Quant
22.5
34–45
Econ
18
46–69
Financial Reporting and Analysis
36
70–78
Corporate Finance
13.5
79–86
Portfolio Management
12
87–98
Equity
18
99–110
Fixed Income
18
111–115
Derivatives
7.5
116–120
Alternative Investments
7.5
Total:
180
By accessing this mock exam, you agree to the following terms of use: This mock exam is provided to currently registered CFA candidates. Candidates may view and print the exam for personal exam prepara-
tion only. The following activities are strictly prohibited and may result in disciplinary and/or legal action: accessing or permitting access by anyone other than currently-registered CFA candidates; copying, posting to any website, emailing, distributing and/or reprinting the mock exam for any purpose
© 2017 CFA Institute. All rights reserved.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
2
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
2018 LEVEL I MOCK EXAM (B) AM
1
Justin Blake, CFA, a retired portfolio manager, owns 20,000 shares of a small public company that he would like to sell because he is worried about the com-
pany’s prospects. He posts messages on several internet bulletin boards. The messages read, “This stock is going up once the pending patents are released, so now is the time to buy. The stock is a buy at anything below $3. I have done some close research on these guys.” According to the Standards of Practice Handbook
, Blake most likely violated the Standard or Standards associated with: A
Integrity of Capital Markets and Conflicts of Interest. B
Integrity of Capital Markets, but not Conflicts of Interest. C
Neither Integrity of Capital Markets nor Conflicts of Interest. B is correct because Blake violated the Integrity of Capital Markets by engaging in a practice that is likely to artificially inflate trading volume [Standard II(B)].
A is incorrect because the Conflicts of Interests [Standard VI(A)] requires disclosure of conflicts to clients, prospective clients, and employers, which is not the case in this example.
C is incorrect because Blake violated the Integrity of Capital Markets Standard. Guidance for Standards I–VII LOS a Standard II(B)–Market Manipulation, Standard VI(A)–Disclosure of Conflicts
2
According to the CFA Institute Code of Ethics and Standards of Professional Conduct, trading on material nonpublic information is least likely to be pre-
vented by establishing: A
firewalls. B
selective disclosure. C
personal trading limitations.
B is correct as selective disclosure occurs when companies discriminate in making material nonpublic information public. Corporations that disclose information on a limited basis create the potential for insider-trading violations. Standard II(A). A is incorrect as an information barrier commonly referred to as a “firewall” is a widely used approach to preventing the communication of material nonpublic information within firms. C is incorrect as limitations on personal trading by employees is one of the recom-
mended procedures for compliance to prevent employees from trading on material nonpublic information.
Guidance for Standards I–VII
LOS c Standard II(A)–Material Nonpublic Information
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
3
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
3
Jefferson Piedmont, CFA, a portfolio manager for Park Investments, plans to manage the portfolios of several family members in exchange for a percentage of each portfolio’s profits. As his family members have extensive portfolios requiring substantial attention, they have requested that Piedmont provide the services outside his employment with Park. Piedmont notifies his employer in writing of his prospective outside employment. Two weeks later, Piedmont begins managing the family members’ portfolios. By managing these portfolios, which of the following CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct has Piedmont violated? A
Conflicts of Interest
B
Additional Compensation C
Both Additional Compensation and Conflicts of Interest C is correct because members should disclose all potential conflicts of interest, the sub-
stantial time involved in managing family accounts, and when engaging in independent practice for compensation should not render services until receiving written consent from all parties [Standard IV(B), Standard VI(A)]. A is incorrect because both standards have been violated.
B is incorrect because both standards have been violated.
Guidance for Standards I–VII LOS a Standard IV(B)–Additional Compensation Arrangements, Standard VI(A)–Disclosure of Conflicts
4
Noor Mawar, CFA, manages a trust fund with the beneficiary being an orphaned 18-year-old student. The investment policy dictates that trust assets are expected to provide the student with a stable low-risk source of income until she reaches the age of 30 years. Based on information from an Internet blog, the student asks Mawar to invest in a new business venture that she expects will provide high returns over the next five years. Mawar ignores the request, instead securing conservative investments to provide sufficient income. Did Mawar most likely
violate the CFA Institute Code of Ethics and Standards of Professional Conduct?
A
Yes.
B
No, because the client’s objectives were met.
C
No, because the investment time frame does not match the investment horizon.
B is correct because the client is the trust/trustees, not the beneficiary. Mawar followed Standard III(C) –Suitability by managing the trust assets in a way that would likely result in a stable source of income while keeping the risk profile low, thereby complying with the investment objectives of the trust.
A is incorrect because Mawar did not violate any Standard as she managed trust assets considering the suitability for the client, not the beneficiary.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
4
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
C is incorrect because the client is the trust/trustees, not the beneficiary. Therefore the time horizon of the investment is not relevant.
Guidance for Standards I–VII
LOS b Standard III(C)–Suitability 5
After a firm presents a minimum required number of years of GIPS-compliant performance, the firm must present an additional year of performance each year, building up to a minimum of: A
10 years of GIPS-compliant performance.
B
5 years of GIPS-compliant performance.
C
15 years of GIPS-compliant performance. A is correct. After a firm presents a minimum of five years of GIPS-compliant performance, the firm must present an additional year of performance each year, building up to a minimum of 10 years of GIPS-compliant performance.
B is incorrect. The initial period is five years of GIPS-compliant performance, building up to a minimum of 10 years of GIPS-compliant performance. C is incorrect. An additional year of performance each year is added building up to a minimum of 10 years of GIPS-compliant performance. The GIPS Standards LOS b
6
In the event of a discrepancy between the official GIPS standards and the local language translation, the official governing language is: A
English.
B
the language of the local country.
C
the language of a neutral country.
A is correct. Although the GIPS standards may be translated into many languages, if a dis-
crepancy arises, the English version of the GIPS standards is the official governing version.
B is incorrect. The English version of the GIPS standards is the official governing version, not the language of the local country. C is incorrect. The English version of the GIPS standards is the official governing version, not the language of a neutral third country.
The GIPS Standards LOS c
7
Disclosure of confidential CFA exam information will most likely
be detected by the Professional Conduct staff through:
A
monitoring online and social media.
B
analysis of Proctor Reports.
C
annual Professional Conduct Statements.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
5
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
A is correct. Professional Conduct inquiries come from a number of sources including the monitoring of online and social media to detect disclosure of confidential exam information. B is incorrect. Candidate conduct is monitored by exam proctors who complete reports on candidates suspected to have violated testing rules during the exam and at the exam center. C is incorrect. Members and candidates must self-disclose on the annual Professional Conduct Statement all matters that question their professional conduct, such as involve
-
ment in civil litigation or a criminal investigation or being the subject of a written complaint. Disclosure of confidential exam information will not be found on the annual statement. Code of Ethics and Standards of Professional Conduct
LOS a
8
When making performance presentations to prospective clients, a GIPS
compli-
ant firm should least likely
do which of the following? A
Selectively report its top fund performance
B
Include the fund performance of former clients
C
Report performance history for all market cycles under review
A is correct. When a firm complies with GIPS standards it cannot selectively choose its top fund performances while excluding weaker performing funds. It must include all fee-paying discretionary funds managed to a similar investment mandate, objective, or strategy.
B is incorrect because GIPS standards require the performance of former clients to be included to avoid survivorship bias.
C is incorrect because GIPS standards require the fund performance to reflect results across all market cycles for the periods under review. Fund managers are not allowed to select a time period during which the mandate produced superior results while leaving out other time period that underperformed (varying time periods).
Introduction to the Global Investment Performance Standards (GIPS)
LOS a
Section I
9
A central bank fines a commercial bank it supervises for not following statutory regulations regarding non-performing loan provisions on three large loans as a result of the bank’s loan provisioning policy. Louis Marie Buffet, CFA, sits on the Board of Directors of the commercial bank as a non-executive director, representing minority shareholders. He also chairs the internal audit committee of the bank that determines the loan provisioning policy of the bank. Mercy Gatabaki, CFA, is the bank’s external auditor and follows international auditing standards whereby she tests the loan portfolio by randomly selecting loans to check for compliance in all aspects of central bank regulations. Which charter-
holder is most likely in violation of the Code and Standard? A
Both. B
Buffet. C
Gatabaki.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
6
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
B is correct because Buffet sat on the audit committee that determined the bank’s provi-
sioning policies that were contrary to the statutory regulations of the central bank. As a result, he most likely violated Standard I–Professionalism by not abiding with regulations of a regulatory body. Gatabaki did not violate Standard I–Professionalism as it is not apparent she knowingly facilitated the incorrect provisioning policy,
A is incorrect because only Buffet is most likely to have violated Standard I–
Professionalism by not following central bank regulations. C is incorrect because Gatabaki most likely did not violate Standard I–Professionalism as it is not apparent she knowingly facilitated the incorrect provisioning policy or followed it. Gatabaki randomly selects loans for her audit and given the relatively small number of loans in violation, it is likely she did not come across the files which were treated in a manner by the bank that was contrary to the central bank regulations.
Guidance for Standards I–VII LOS a Standard I(A)–Knowledge of the Law 10
Diana Fairbanks, CFA, is married to an auditor who is employed at a large accounting firm. When her husband mentions that a computer firm he audits will receive a qualified opinion she thinks nothing of it. Later that week when she reviews a new client account she notices that there are substantial holdings of this computer firm. When she does a thorough internet search for news on the company, she does not find anything about its most recent audit or any other adverse information. Which of the following actions concerning the computer stock should Fairbanks most likely take to avoid violating the CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct?
A
Take no investment action.
B
Complete a thorough and diligent analysis of the company and then sell the stock. C
Sell the stock immediately as she has a reasonable basis for taking this investment action.
A is correct as the information concerning the qualified opinion is nonpublic and if it is material she would be in violation of Standard II(A) if she took investment action based on the information. She should also make reasonable efforts to achieve public dissem-
ination of the information. B is incorrect because she should make reasonable efforts to achieve public dissem-
ination of the information prior to selling the stock. C is incorrect because she should make reasonable efforts to achieve public dissem-
ination of the information prior to selling the stock. Guidance for Standards I–VII
LOS c
Standard II(A)–Material Nonpublic Information
11
Sherry Buckner, CFA, manages equity accounts for government entities whose portfolios are classified as being conservative and risk averse. Since the objec-
tive of her clients is to maximize returns with the lowest possible risk, Buckner considers adding to their holdings a new, thinly traded, leveraged derivative
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
7
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
product that she believes has the potential for high returns. To make her invest-
ment decision, Buckner relies upon comprehensive research from an invest-
ment bank with a solid reputation for top quality research. After her review of that research, Buckner positions her accounts so each has a 10% allocation to the derivative product. Did Buckner most likely violate any CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct by purchasing the derivative product for her clients?
A
No.
B
Yes, related to Suitability.
C
Yes, related to Loyalty, Prudence, and Care. B is correct as Buckner is in violation of Standard III(C) since she did not consider issues such as the limited liquidity or any potential leverage of this new product when she invested a substantial percentage of her clients’ portfolios in these instruments. A is incorrect because Buckner violated the suitability Standard.
C is incorrect because Buckner relied upon comprehensive research from the invest-
ment bank.
Guidance for Standards I–VII
LOS b
Standard III(C)–Suitability
12
Which of the following is least
likely
part of the CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct, Standard V(B)–Communication with Clients and Prospective Clients? Members and candidates must:
A
make reasonable efforts to ensure that when communicating investment performance information it is fair, accurate, and complete.
B
disclose to clients and prospective clients significant limitations and risks associated with the investment process. C
distinguish between fact and opinion in the presentation of investment anal-
ysis and recommendations. A is correct. The statement, “When communicating investment performance informa-
tion, Members and Candidates must make reasonable efforts to ensure that it is fair, accurate, and complete.” can be found in The CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct, Standard III–Duties to Clients (D) Performance Presentation. It is not part of Standard V–Investment Analysis, Recommendations, and Actions (B) Communication with Clients and Prospective Clients.
B is incorrect. The statement, “Members and Candidates must disclose to clients and prospective clients significant limitations and risks associated with the investment pro-
cess” can be found in The CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct, Standard V–
Investment Analysis, Recommendations, and Actions (B) Communication with Clients and Prospective Clients.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
8
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
C is incorrect. The statement, “Members and Candidates must distinguish between fact and opinion in the presentation of investment analysis and recommendations” can be found in The CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct, Standard V–Investment Analysis, Recommendations, and Actions (B) Communication with Clients and Prospective Clients.
Code of Ethics and Standards of Professional Conduct
LOS b
13
Jack Steyn, CFA, recently became the head of the trading desk at a large investment management firm that specializes in domestic equities. While reviewing the firm’s trading operations he notices that clients give discretion to the manager to select brokers on the basis of their overall services to the management firm. Despite the client directive, Steyn would most likely
violate Standard III(A)–Loyalty, Prudence, and Care if he pays soft commissions for which of the following services from the brokers?
A
Equity research reports
B
Investment conference attendance
C
Database services for offshore investments C is correct because Standard III(A)–Loyalty, Prudence, and Care stipulates that the client owns the brokerage. Therefore, members and candidates are required to only use client brokerage to the benefit of the clients (soft commissions policy). As the firm specializes in domestic equity, an offshore investment database service would not benefit clients. A is incorrect because it is likely that equity research reports would benefit all clients.
B is incorrect because it is likely that attendance at an investment conference could lead to ideas and subsequent investment actions that would benefit all clients.
Guidance for Standards I–VII
LOS b
14
Henrietta Huerta, CFA, writes a weekly investment newsletter to market her services and obtain new asset management clients. A third party distributes the free newsletter on her behalf to those individuals on its mailing list. As a result, it is widely read by thousands of individual investors. The newsletter recom-
mendations reflect most of Huerta’s investment actions. After completing fur-
ther research on East-West Coffee Roasters, Huerta decides to change her initial buy recommendation to a sell. To avoid violating the CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct it would be most appropriate for Huerta to distribute the new investment recommendation to: A
newsletter recipients first.
B
asset management clients first.
C
newsletter recipients and asset management clients simultaneously.
B is correct because according to Standard III(A)–Loyalty, Prudence, and Care, members and candidates must place their clients’ interests first before their own interests. The temptation may be to release the changed recommendation to newsletter recipients
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
9
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
simultaneously with or even before the asset management clients to try to obtain new clients. However, to avoid violating Standard III(A)–Loyalty, Prudence, and Care, Huerta must ensure that any change in an investment recommendation is first distributed to her asset management clients before any newsletter recipients, who are not necessarily clients (that is, they receive the newsletter for free from a third party distribution list).
A is incorrect because according to Standard III(A)–Loyalty, Prudence, and Care members and candidates when making investment recommendations (or changing investment recommendations) must give priority to clients; i.e., asset management clients rather than to non-clients; i.e., newspaper recipients who receive the newsletter for free from a third party distribution list.
C is incorrect because according to Standard III(A)–Loyalty, Prudence, and Care, members and candidates when making investment recommendations (or changing investment recommendations) must give priority to clients, i.e., asset management clients rather than to non-clients, i.e., newspaper recipients who receive the newsletter for free from a third party distribution list.
Guidance for Standards I–VII
LOS c
15
Wouter Duyck, CFA, is the sole proprietor of an investment advisory firm serving several hundred middle class retail clients. Duyck claims to be different from his competitors because he conducts research himself. He discloses that to simplify the management of all these accounts he has created a recommended list of stocks, from which he selects investments for all of his clients based on their suitability. Duyck’s recommended list of stocks is obtained from his pri-
mary broker, who has completed due diligence on each stock. Duyck’s recom-
mended list least likely
violates which of the following CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct? A
Fair Dealing.
B
Misrepresentation.
C
Diligence and Reasonable Basis.
A is correct because Standard III(B)–Fair Dealing concerns the fair treatment of clients when making investment recommendations or taking investment action, but there is no indication that the advisor has discriminated against any clients with regard to his recommendations as he invests all clients in the same universe of stocks. The advisor has violated Standard I(C)–Misrepresentation with his research, which is not independently created and instead relies upon information provided by his broker. This is contrary to the advisor telling clients he does his own independent investment research. In addition, the advisor has violated Standard V(A)–Diligence and Reasonable Basis, as he has not made reasonable and diligent efforts to determine if the third party’s research is sound. B is incorrect, as the advisor has violated Standard I(C)–Misrepresentation with his research, which is not independently created and instead relies upon information pro-
vided by his broker.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
10
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
C is incorrect, as the advisor has violated Standard V(A)–Diligence and Reasonable Basis as he does not have a reasonable basis for making his investment recommendations and relies solely on his broker’s research to create his list of stock investments. This is directly contrary to telling clients that he does his own independent investment research.
Guidance for Standards I–VII
LOS b
Standard I(C)–Misrepresentation, Standard III(B)–Fair Dealing, Standard V(A)–Diligence and Reasonable Basis 16
Heidi Halvorson, CFA, is the Chief Investment Officer for Tukwila Investors, an asset management firm specializing in fixed-income investments. Tukwila is in danger of losing one of its largest clients, Quinault Jewelers, which accounts for nearly one third of its revenues. Quinault recently told Halverson that Tukwila would be fired unless the performance of Quinault’s portfolio improves sig-
nificantly. Shortly after this conversation, Halvorson purchases two corporate bonds she believes are suitable for any of her clients based upon third party research from a reliable and diligent source. Immediately after the purchase, one bond increases significantly in price while the other bond declines sig-
nificantly. At the end of the day, Halvorson allocates the profitable bond trade to Quinault and the other bond to two of her largest institutional accounts. Halvorson most likely
violated the CFA Institute Standards of Professional with regards to:
A
client suitability.
B
trade allocations.
C
third party research.
B is correct because the investment officer failed to deal fairly for her clients by allocating profitable trades to a favored client at the expense of others, a violation of Standard III(B)–
Fair Dealing. The standard requires members and candidates to treat all clients fairly when taking investment action. Tukwila should have a systematic approach to allocating trades, such as pro rata, before or at the time of trade execution or as soon as possible after trades are executed.
A is incorrect because the analyst believes the bonds are suitable for any of her clients and has not violated Standard III(C)–Suitability.
C is incorrect because the analyst does have a reasonable or adequate basis for her investment decision, because it is based upon reliable third party research, and has not violated Standard V(A)–Diligence and Reasonable Basis. Guidance for Standards I–VII
LOS b
Standard III(B)–Fair Dealing, Standard III(C)–Suitability, Standard V(A)–Diligence and Reasonable Basis
17
Alan Quanta, CFA, provides credit rating analysis of high-yield bonds using external credit ratings as a foundation. At the end of the last quarter, Quanta’s firm, North Investment Bank, held a large position in the bonds of Veyron Corporation, a real estate company with all of its land holdings in a country recently downgraded by several credit rating agencies. The downgrades made Veyron bonds extremely difficult to sell because the bond price has dropped every day since the downgrades. Quanta has been asked by his supervisor to contact the firm’s institutional clients to convince them Veyron bonds are still
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
11
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
an attractive purchase, especially at these lower prices. Quanta does not con-
sider the Veyron bonds a buy at this price level. According to the CFA Institute Code of Ethics and Standards of Professional Conduct, the most appropriate
action for Quanta is to:
A
obey his supervisor’s request.
B
ignore his supervisor’s request.
C
promote the bonds with appropriate disclosures.
B is correct because Quanta must refuse to promote Veyron bonds until they are an attractive purchase based on fundamental analysis and market pricing. If Quanta followed the request from his supervisor, he would be in violation of Standard I(B)–Independence and Objectivity, as he does not rate Veyron bonds as a buy. His opinion of the Veyron bonds must not be affected by internal pressure or compensation.
A is incorrect because Quanta should refuse to follow his supervisor’s request and promote the bonds as his opinion of the Veyron bonds must not be affected by internal pressure or compensation. C is incorrect because Quanta should refuse to promote the bonds as his opinion of the Veyron bonds must not be affected by internal pressure or compensation. Guidance for Standards I–VII
LOS b
Standard I(B)–Independence and Objectivity
18
A large manufacturing company is seeking help finding a fund manager for its pension plan. After a comprehensive but unsuccessful search, Brett Arun, CFA, is hired to solicit proposals from various fund managers. The client pays Arun a lump sum fee for his services. The search concludes with Ramport Investments being hired as the pension plan’s manager. A year after Ramport is hired, the pension administrator sends Arun a letter telling him how satisfied the pension trustees are with the services provided by the fund manager. Subsequently, without the plan sponsor’s knowledge, Arun receives a payment from Ramport for successfully introducing it to the pension plan under an agreement Arun entered into with Ramport when the initial contact with the fund manager was made. With regard to the payment received, did Arun most likely
violate the CFA Institute Code of Ethics and Standards of Professional Conduct?
A
No.
B
Yes, because he did not disclose the referral fee to the client.
C
Yes, because he should have refused payment from the fund manager.
C is correct because Arun has violated Standard VI(C)–Referral Fees because he did not disclose the referral fee arrangement with Ramport to his client prior to Ramport being appointed as the client’s fund manager. This disclosure is necessary for the client to be able to determine Arun’s level of independence and objectivity in recommending Ramport to the fund. If Arun had made proper disclosure, he would be able to accept the payment without violating any Standards. A is incorrect because Arun has violated Standard VI(C)–Referral Fees because he did not disclose the fee paid by Ramport.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
12
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
B is incorrect because Arun violated Standard VI(C)–Referral Fees when he accepted the fee paid by Ramport. Disclosure after the fact would not cure the acceptance of the fee because disclosure should have occurred prior to the search being conducted. Withholding this information raises the question of a potential lack of objectivity in the recommendations Arun is making. There are also questions concerning the legality of having firms pay so that they may be entered in the money manager search. Guidance for Standards I–VII
LOS c
Standard VI(C)–Referral Fees 19
An individual wants to be able to spend €80,000 per year for an anticipated 25 years in retirement. To fund this retirement account, he will make annual deposits of €6,608 at the end of each of his working years. He can earn 6% com-
pounded annually on all investments. The minimum number of deposits that are needed to reach his retirement goal is closest
to:
A
51.
B
40.
C
28.
B is correct. The following figure represents the timeline for the problem:
0
1
(€6,608)
...
...
R
(€6,608)
R
+ 1
(€80,000)
...
...
R
+ 25
(€80,000)
Using a financial calculator, the funds needed at retirement (
R
on the timeline) are calculated: N
= 25; I
/
Y
= 6%; PMT = €80,000; Future value (FV) = €0; Mode = End. The calculated present value (PV) is €1,022,668.
PV
=
-
+
(
)
=
-
(
)
A
r
r
N
1
1
1
80 000
1
1
1 06
0 06
25
,
.
.
=
1 022 688
,
,
Then, €1,022,668 is used as the FV (at R
on the timeline) for the accumulation phase annuity as per: I
/
Y
= 6%; PV = €0; PMT = –€6,608; FV = €1,022,668; Mode = End. The computed N
is 40.
Alternatively, 40 could be calculated with the formula:
FV
=
+
(
)
-
A
r
r
N
1
1
and solving for N
,
1 022 668
6 608
1
0 06
1
0 06
,
,
,
.
.
=
+
(
)
-
N
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
13
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
A is incorrect. 80,000 is multiplied by 25 years (2,000,000) and the result is used as the FV of the 6,608 annuity at 6% and PV = 0. The result is N
= 50.67.
C is incorrect. 80,000 is multiplied by 25 years and then discounted at 6% for 25 years (465,997). The result is used as the PV of the 6,608 annuity at 6% as follows: I
/
Y
= 6%; PMT = 6,608; PV =465,997; FV = 0; Calculate N
: N
= –28.40 and the minus sign is ignored.
The Time Value of Money
LOS e, f
Sections 4.1, 6.1
20
A company has an unsecured line of credit and needs to maintain its EBIT- to-interest coverage ratio greater than 2.0. Its EBIT is estimated to be between $36 million and $48 million, with all values equally likely. If the forecasted interest charge for the year is $20 million, the probability that EBIT/interest will be more than 2.0 is closest
to:
A
61.5%.
B
33.3%.
C
66.7%.
C is correct. The EBIT-to-interest ratio is equal to 2.0 when the EBIT is $40 million. Given that the values between $36 million and $48 million are equally likely, the probability of the ratio being equal to or less than 2.0 is 33.3% (= [$40 million – $36 million]/[$48 million – $36 million]). Consequently, the probability of the ratio being greater than 2.0 is 66.7% (i.e., 1 – Probability of the ratio being equal to or less than 2.0).
A is incorrect. This treats the distribution as discrete with increments in $1M.
EBIT
Int
EBIT/INT
36
20
1.8
37
20
1.85
38
20
1.9
39
20
1.95
40
20
2
41
20
2.05
42
20
2.1
43
20
2.15
44
20
2.2
45
20
2.25
46
20
2.3
47
20
2.35
48
20
2.4
Cell Count
13
8
0.615
Prob >2.0
B is incorrect. This is the probability of the ratio being equal to or less than 2.0.
Common Probability Distributions
LOS h
Section 3.1
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
14
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
21
A small-cap growth fund’s monthly returns for the past 36 months have been consistently outperforming its benchmark. An analyst is determining whether the standard deviation of monthly returns is greater than 6%. Which of the following best
describes the hypothesis to be tested?
A
H
0
: σ
2
≤ 0.36%
B
H
a
: σ
2
> 6%
C
H
0
: σ
2
≥ 0.36%
A is correct. This is a one-tailed hypothesis testing with a “greater than” alternative hypothesis. A squared standard deviation is being used to obtain a test of variance. The hypotheses are H
0
: σ
2
≤ 0.36% versus H
a
: σ
2
> 0.36%.
B is incorrect as explained in choice A.
C is incorrect as explained in choice A
Hypothesis Testing
LOS b
Section 2
22
The variance of returns of Asset A is 625. The variance of returns of Asset B is 1,225. The covariance of returns between Asset A and Asset B is 600. The cor-
relation of returns between Asset A and Asset B is closest
to:
A
0.29.
B
0.69.
C
0.47.
B is correct. Correlation of returns between asset i
and j
, ρ(
R
i
,
R
j
), is defined as:
ρ(
R
i
,
R
j
) = Cov(
R
i
,
R
j
)/σ(
R
i
)σ(
R
j
)
where
R
i
and R
j
= the returns of assets i
and j
Cov(
R
i
,
R
j
) = the covariance of returns between assets i
and j
σ(
R
i
) and σ(
R
j
) = the standard deviations of returns of assets i
and j
In this problem, the correlation is 600
625
1 225
×
(
)
,
= 0.6857 ~ 0.69.
A is incorrect. The mistake is an incorrect order of operations as in 600
625
1 255
(
)
×
,
= 840, then the square root of 840 is taken: 840
= 28.98. The result is divided by 100: 28.98/100 = 0.2898 ~ 0.29.
C is incorrect. It is calculated as follows: 600
2
/(625 × 1,225) = 0.47.
Probability Concepts
LOS k
Section 3
23
The central limit theorem is best described as stating that the sampling distribu-
tion of the sample mean will be approximately normal for large-size samples:
A
if the population distribution is normal.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
15
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
B
for populations described by any probability distribution.
C
if the population distribution is symmetrical.
B is correct. The central limit theorem holds without regard for the distribution of the underlying population.
A is incorrect because the central limit theorem holds without regard for the distri-
bution of the underlying population.
C is incorrect because the central limit theorem holds without regard for the distri-
bution of the underlying population.
Sampling and Estimation
Section 3.1
LOS e
24
Technical analysts most likely
study trends and patterns in security prices to forecast a company’s:
A
future price trends.
B
earnings potential.
C
intrinsic value.
A is correct. Technical analysts believe that market trends and patterns tend to repeat, so they rely on recognizing past patterns in an attempt to project future security price patterns.
B is incorrect. Forecasting a company’s earnings potential would fall under funda-
mental analysis, not technical analysis.
C is incorrect. Forecasting a company’s intrinsic value would fall under fundamental analysis, not technical analysis.
Technical Analysis
LOS a
Sections 2.1, 2.2
25
Given a large random sample, which of the following types of data are
least
appropriately analyzed with nonparametric tests?
A
Signed data (e.g., number of positives and negatives)
B
Ranked data (e.g., 1st, 3rd)
C
Numerical values (e.g., 28.43, 79.11)
C is correct. Nonparametric tests are primarily concerned with ranks, signs, or groups, and they are used when numerical parameters are not known or do not meet assumptions about distributions. Even if the underlying distribution is unknown, parametric tests can be used on numerical data if the sample is large.
A is incorrect because nonparametric tests can be used on grouped or counted data.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
16
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
B is incorrect because nonparametric tests can be used on ranked data.
Hypothesis Testing
LOS k
Section 5
26
A group of fund analysts have to select the first, second, and third best fund manager of the year for 2012 based on their subjective judgment. If 10 fund managers are candidates for the three awards, the number of ways in which each analyst can make his ranking is closest
to:
A
30.
B
720.
C
120.
B is correct. This problem is a counting one in which order does matter. For this reason, use the permutation formula
n
P
r
= n
n
r
!
!
-
(
)
,
where
n
= the total number of fund managers; in the problem, n
= 10.
r
= the number of fund managers that will receive the awards (first, second, and third); in the problem, r
= 3.
10
P
3
= 10
10
3
10
7
3 628 800
5 040
!
!
!
!
,
,
,
-
(
)
=
=
= 720
There are 720 ways that each analyst can rank 3 fund managers out of 10, when order does matter.
A is incorrect. It uses the following calculation: 3 × 10 = 30. C is incorrect. It uses the combination formula as follows:
n
C
r
= n
r
n
n
r r
=
-
(
)
=
-
(
)
=
=
!
! !
!
! !
!
! !
,
,
,
10
10
3 3
10
7 3
3 628 800
30 240
= 120
Probability Concepts
LOS o
Section 4.2
27
The bond-equivalent yield for a semi-annual pay bond is most likely
:
A
equal to the effective annual yield.
B
equal to double the semi-annual yield to maturity.
C
more than the effective annual yield.
B is correct. The bond equivalent yield for a semi-annual pay bond is equal to double the semi-annual yield to maturity and is lower than the effective annual yield.
A is incorrect. The bond equivalent yield for a semi-annual pay bond is equal to double the semi-annual yield to maturity and is lower than the effective annual yield.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
17
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
C is incorrect. The bond equivalent yield for a semi-annual pay bond is equal to double the semi-annual yield to maturity and is lower than the effective annual yield.
Discounted Cash Flow Applications
LOS e, f
Section 4
28
An analyst gathers the following information about the performance of a port-
folio ($ millions):
Quarter
Value at Beginning of Quarter (Prior to Inflow or Outflow)
Cash Inflow (Outflow) at Beginning of Quarter
Value at End of Quarter
1
2.0
0.2
2.4
2
2.4
0.4
2.6
3
2.6
(0.2)
3.2
4
3.2
1.0
4.1
The portfolio’s annual time-weighted rate of return is closest
to:
A
8%.
B
32%.
C
27%.
B is correct. The time-weighted rate of return is calculated by computing the quar-
terly holding period returns and linking those returns into an annual return as follows:
Quarter
Value ($ millions) at Beginning of Quarter (Considering Inflows and Outflows)
Value ($ millions) at End of Quarter
Holding Period Return
1
2.0 + 0.2 = 2.2
2.4
(2.4 – 2.2)/2.2 = 9.09%
2
2.4 + 0.4 = 2.8
2.6
(2.6 – 2.8)/2.8 = –7.14%
3
2.6 – 0.2 = 2.4
3.2
(3.2 – 2.4)/2.4 = 33.33%
4
3.2 + 1.0 = 4.2
4.1
(4.1 – 4.2)/4.2 = –2.38%
The time-weighted return (TWR) is found as follows:
TWR = (1 + 9.09%) × (1 – 7.14%) × (1 + 33.33%) × (1 – 2.38%) – 1 = 32% (rounded)
A is incorrect. It uses the following formula:
1
9 09
1
7 14
1
33 33
1
2 38
1
4
+
(
)
×
-
(
)
×
+
(
)
×
-
(
)
-
.
%
.
%
.
%
.
%
= 8% (rounded)
C is incorrect. It is the money-weighted rate of return (MWR). Solve for r
in the fol-
lowing formula:
2
0 2
0 4
1
1
1
0 2
1
4 1
1
1
3
2
4
+
(
)
+
+
(
)
+
+
(
)
=
+
(
)
+
+
(
)
.
.
.
.
r
r
r
r
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
18
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
To solve, use the cash flow (CF) function of a financial calculator and enter: CF0 = –2 – 0.2= –2.2, CF1 = –0.4, CF2 = 0.2, CF3 = –1, and CF4 = 4.1. Compute the quarterly IRR and obtain 6.09%. By annualizing we obtain: (1 + 0.0609)
4
– 1 = 27% (rounded). Discounted Cash Flow Applications
LOS c, d
Sections 3, 3.2
29
The joint probability of events A
and B
is 32%, with the probability of event A
being 60% and the probability of event B
being 50%. On the basis of this information, the conditional probability of event A
given that event B
occurs is closest to
:
A
53.3%.
B
30.0%.
C
64.0%.
C is correct. The conditional probability of A
given that B
has occurred is equal to the joint probability of A
and B
divided by the probability of B
. In this case:
P
(
A
| B
) = P
(
AB
)/
P
(
B
) = 32.0%/50.0% = 64.0%
B is incorrect because it equals P
(
A
) × P
(
B
) = 60.0% × 50.0% = 30.0%
A is incorrect because it is P
(
B
| A
) = P
(
AB
)/
P
(
A
) = 32.0%/60.0% = 53.3%
Probability Concepts
LOS f
Section 2
30
If the stated annual interest rate is 20% and the frequency of compounding is monthly, the effective annual rate (EAR) is closest to:
A
20%.
B
21%.
C
22%.
C is correct. EAR = (1 + periodic interest rate)
m
– 1 = (1 + 0.20/12)
12
– 1 = 0.21939%, rounded to 22%.
A is incorrect. It is simply the given stated annual rate.
B is incorrect. It uses semiannual compounding as follows: (1 + 0.20/2)
2
– 1 = 21%.
The Time Value of Money
LOS c
Section 3.3
31
The following 10 observations are a sample drawn from a normal population: 25, 20, 18, –5, 35, 21, –11, 8, 20, and 9. The mean of the sample is closest to:
A
17.20.
B
14.00.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
19
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
C
15.56.
B is correct. The sum of the 10 numbers is 140. Dividing by 10 gives the mean of 14.
A is incorrect and is calculated by adding the absolute values of the ten numbers (i.e., –11 is valued as 11 and –5 is valued as 5).
C is incorrect and is calculated by dividing 140 by 9 (i.e., by n
– 1 rather than n
).
Statistical Concepts and Market Returns
LOS e
Section 5.1.2
32
A subset of a population is
best described as a:
A
statistic.
B
sample.
C
conditional distribution.
B is correct. A sample is a subset of a population.
A is incorrect. A statistic is a quantity computed from or used to describe a sample of data.
C is incorrect. A conditional distribution is a misnomer, but it sounds like the distri-
bution of some value conditional upon some event.
Statistical Concepts and Market Returns
LOS a
Section 2.2
33
If the price of a stock goes from $15.00 to $16.20 in one year, the continuously compounded rate of return is closest
to:
A
7.70%.
B
8.33%.
C
8.00%.
A is correct. The continuously compounded rate of return is calculated with the following formula: r
0,
T
= ln(
S
T
/
S
0
)
where
r
0,
T
= r
0,1
= and is the continuously compounded rate of return from time 0 to time T
(1 year)
S
0
= 15.00 and is the price of the stock at time 0
S
T
= 16.20 and is the price of the stock at time T
(1 year)
The continuously compounded rate of return is: r
0,1
= ln(16.20/15.00) = 7.70%.
Alternatively, the end of period price, 16.20 can be found from 15.00 × e
0.077×1
.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
20
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
B is incorrect. It is calculated as: exp(Holding period return) – 1= exp[(16.20/15.00) – 1] – 1 = exp(8.00%) – 1 = 8.33%.
C is incorrect. It is the holding period return: (16.20/15.00) – 1 = 8.00%.
Common Probability Distributions
LOS o
Section 3.4
34
The price of a good falls from $15 to $13. Given this decline in price, the quan-
tity demanded of the good rises from 100 units to 120 units. The own-price elasticity of demand for the good is closest to:
A
–0.67.
B
–1.50.
C
–1.25.
B is correct. The own-price elasticity of demand E
p
d
x
(
)
is calculated as:
E
Q
P
p
d
x
d
x
x
=
=
-
-
= -
%
%
.
Δ
Δ
120
100
100
13
15
15
1 50
where
%
∅
Q
x
d
= the change in quantity (in %)
%
∅
P
x
= the change in price (in %)
A is incorrect. It uses %Δ
P
/%Δ
Q
, calculated as [(13 – 15)/15]/[(120 – 100)/100] = –0.67.
C is incorrect. It uses correct formula, but bases %Δ
Q
on new level of demand, calcu-
lated as [(120 – 100)/120]/[(13 – 15)/15] = –1.25.
Topics in Demand and Supply Analysis
LOS a
Section 2.2
35
Three firms operate under perfect competition, producing 900 units of the same product but using different production technologies. Each company’s cost structure is indicated in the table:
Company
X
Y
Z
Total Variable Costs
$2,700
$3,600
$4,500
Total Fixed Costs
2,700
1,800
900
Total Costs
$5,400
$5,400
$5,400
Which of the following statements is most
accurate? If the unit selling price is:
A
$6.00, all firms should exit the market in the long run.
B
$4.50, all firms should continue to operate in the short run, but exit the market in the long run if these conditions are expected to persist.
C
3.00, Firm X should continue to operate in the short run, but Firms Y and Z should shut down production.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
21
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
C is correct.
Revenue–Cost Relationship
Short-Run Decision
Long-Term Decision
TR ≥ TC
Stay in market
Stay in market
TR > TVC but TR < TFC + TVC
Stay in market
Exit market
TR < TVC
Shut down production
Exit market
TR = Total Revenue; TC = Total Costs; TVC = Total Variable Costs; TFC = Total Fixed Costs
Hence, if the selling price is $3.00, total revenue for all firms will be $3.00/unit × 900 units = $2,700. Only Firm X’s variable costs are covered and it should continue operating, while Firms Y and Z should immediately shut down production.
A is incorrect. If total revenue equals or exceeds total costs, the firms should remain in the market both in the long and short run: each firm is just earning an economic profit, which includes its opportunity cost.
B is incorrect. At $4.50, total revenue is $4.50 × 900 = $4,050. Only Firms X and Y cover their variable costs; Firm Z should shut down. It is true, however, that if conditions persist, all should shut down in the long run as they won’t be covering their total costs.
Topics in Demand and Supply Analysis
LOS e
Section 3.2.7
36
In a country with a high level of income, as domestic income rises, it is most likely
that an increase will occur in:
A
the fiscal balance.
B
private saving and investment.
C
the trade balance.
B is correct. In a country with a high level of income, as domestic income rises, private saving and investment will increase.
A is incorrect. The fiscal balance is given by G – T. An increase in domestic income leads to an increase in net taxes. Government’s fiscal balance will decrease (smaller deficit or larger surplus).
C is incorrect. The trade balance is given by X – M. An increase in domestic income leads to an increase in imports and lower net exports. The trade balance will decrease.
Aggregate Output, Prices, and Economic Growth
LOS e
Section 3.1.1
37
In order to reduce a trade deficit, the government of a country experiencing full employment moves to depreciate its currency. As a result, if the country’s domestic spending declines relative to income, the most likely
mechanism that causes this to occur is the:
A
income effect.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
22
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
B
wealth effect.
C
substitution effect.
B is correct. At full employment, a weaker currency reduces the purchasing power of all domestic currency denominated assets (including the present value of current and future income). Households respond by reducing general expenditures and increasing savings. This response is the wealth effect and reflects the proportion of one’s income that is saved (or spent).
A is incorrect. The income effect arises when the price of a good changes: with currency depreciation, foreign goods are more expensive, so real purchasing power (income) is reduced.
C is incorrect. The substitution effect refers to the changes in the composition of spending across different product areas. With currency depreciation, less foreign goods relative to domestic goods are purchased.
Currency Exchange Rates
LOS j
Sections 5.2
Aggregate Output, Prices, and Economic Growth
LOS h
Section 3.3.1
38
Which characteristic is a firm least likely
to exhibit when it operates in a market with a downward sloping demand curve, many competitors, and zero economic profits in the long run?
A
No pricing power
B
Low barriers to entry
C
Differentiated product
A is correct. The characteristics of monopolistic competition include a large number of competitors, low pricing power, and the production of differentiated products (through advertising and other non-price strategies), but these still result in some pricing power. The ease of entry results in zero economic profits in the long run.
B is incorrect. Low barriers to entry are a characteristic of monopolistic competition.
C is incorrect. Product differentiation is a characteristic of monopolistic competition.
The Firm and Market Structures
LOS a, b
Sections 2.1, 2.2, 4
39
Cost–push inflation is least likely to be affected by an increase in:
A
employee wages.
B
finished goods prices.
C
commodity prices.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
23
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
B is correct. Cost–push inflation arises due to increases in costs associated with produc-
tion: wages and raw materials prices.
A is incorrect. Cost–push inflation arises due to increases in costs associated with production. Wages are the single biggest cost to businesses.
C is incorrect. Cost–push inflation arises due to increases in costs associated with production. Commodities are an input to production, so they are major source of cost–
push inflation.
Understanding Business Cycles
LOS h
Section 4.2.4.1
40
The following information is available for 2011:
New Zealand
Canada
Jan 1
Dec 31
Jan 1
Dec 31
Price index
1,137
1,158
117.8
119.9
Nominal exchange rate: NZD/CAD
1.2844
1.2589
The change in the real exchange rate (in NZD/CAD terms) is closest
to:
A
–2.05%.
B
–1.92%.
C
+1.96%.
A is correct.
Formula
New Zealand
Canada
Inflation rate
(I
1
– I
0
)/I
0
(1,158 – 1,137)/1,137 = 1.85%
(119.9 – 117.8)/117.8 = 1.78%
Nominal Exchange Rate Change
(S
1
– S
0
)/S
0
(1.2589 – 1.2844)/1.2844 = –1.99%
Real Exchange Rate Change
1
1
1
+
×
+
+
Δ
Δ
Δ
S
S
P
P
P
P
NZD CAD
NZD CAD
Canada
Canada
NZ
NZ
-
1
1
0 0199
1
0 0178
1
0 0185
1
2 05
-
(
)
×
+
(
)
+
(
)
-
= -
.
.
.
.
Approximation:
–1.99% + 1.78% – 1.85% = –2.06%
B is incorrect. It uses the correct change in nominal exchange rate, but inverts the inflation rate ratio: (1 – 0.0199) × (1.0185)/(1.0178) – 1 = –1.92% or –1.99% +1.85% – 1.78%.
C is incorrect. It uses the appreciation of the Canadian dollar but the correct ratio of inflation rate changes; CAD/NZD: (0.7943 – 0.7786)/0.7786 = +2.02% or [1/(1 – 0.0199)] – 1 = 2.03%. Giving (1 + 0.0203) ×1.0178/1.0185 – 1= +1.96% or (+2.03 +1.78% – 1.85% = +1.96%).
Understanding Business Cycles
LOS g
Sections 4.2.2 and 4.2.3
Currency Exchange Rates
(continued)
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
24
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
LOS a, c
Section 2
41
Assume that the central bank reduces the reserve requirement. The most likely
effect will be:
A
a decrease in the money supply.
B
a decrease in new deposits.
C
an increase in the money multiplier.
C is correct. Reducing the reserve requirement will increase the money supply, money multiplier, and new deposits.
A is incorrect because the money supply will increase.
B is incorrect because new deposits will increase.
Monetary and Fiscal Policy
LOS c
Section 2.1.2
42
Assuming its trading partner does not retaliate, which of the following condi-
tions must
hold in order for a large country to increase its national welfare by imposing a tariff?
A
The deadweight loss must be smaller than the benefit of its improving terms of trade.
B
It must auction the import licenses for a fee to offset the decline in the con-
sumer surplus.
C
It must have a comparative advantage in the production of the imported good.
A is correct. The large country is able to cause the foreign exporter to reduce price in order to retain market share. In the large country, domestic producers gain from higher volume and the government gains from collecting the tariff. The sum of these two gains must exceed the deadweight loss to domestic consumers to achieve a national welfare gain. The change in terms of trade causes income redistribution from the foreign exporter to the domestic producer.
B is incorrect. An import license relates to a quota, not a tariff.
C is incorrect. If the large country had a comparative advantage, it would be exporting more than importing. This is not relevant to whether there is a net domestic gain from the tariff. The tariff hurts domestic consumers. Unless the gain from the tariff exceeds the loss to consumers, national welfare will decrease.
International Trade and Capital Flows
LOS e
Section 3.1
43
A dealer report includes the following exchange rate details:
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
25
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
Spot Rate
Expected Change over Next Year
USD/EUR
1.30
1.75%
CAD/USD
0.95
–0.25%
CHF/EUR
1.22
0.75%
The expected CAD/CHF cross rate in one year is closest to
:
A
1.04.
B
0.98.
C
1.02.
C is correct.
Spot Rate
Expected Appreciation
Expected Spot Rate in One Year
USD/EUR
1.30
1.75%
1.323
CAD/USD
0.95
–0.25%
0.948
CHF/EUR
1.22
0.75%
1.229
CAD/CHF
=
(USD/EUR) × [(CAD/USD)/
(CHF/EUR)]
= 1.020
A is incorrect because the cross rates are calculated incorrectly: CAD/CHF = S
CHF
CAD
expected appreciation of the 3 exchange rates
×
+
(
)
∑
1
= 1.012 × [1 + (1.75% – 0.25% + 0.75%)]
= 1.012 × (1 + 2.25%)
= 1.035
B is incorrect. It calculates the Swiss Franc (CHF) relative to the Canadian dollar (CAD): (CHF/EUR)/[(USD/EUR)/(CAD/USD)] = 1.229/(1.323/0.948) = 0.881.
Currency Exchange Rates
LOS d
Section 3.2
44
Higher than expected inflation will most likely
lead to an increase in:
A
the real wealth of borrowers.
B
investment.
C
the information content of market prices for economic agents.
A is correct. Unexpected inflation that is higher than anticipated will likely result in bor-
rowers benefiting at the expense of creditors as the real value of their borrowing declines.
B is incorrect because higher than expected inflation will likely result in greater inflation uncertainty. Lenders will ask for a premium to compensate for this uncertainty, which leads to higher borrowing costs and thereby will discourage investment.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
26
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
C is incorrect because one of the potentially destabilizing effects of unexpected inflation is that it can reduce the information content of market prices.
Monetary and Fiscal Policy
LOS g
Section 2.3.1
45
The structural deficit is equal to the budget deficit:
A
adjusted for inflation.
B
that would exist at full employment.
C
excluding the impact of automatic stabilizers.
B is correct. The structural deficit is the deficit that would exist if the economy was at full employment (or full potential output). Economists often consider the structural deficit as an indicator of the fiscal policy stance.
A is incorrect because the structural deficit makes no adjustment for inflation.
C is incorrect because the structural deficit includes (rather than excludes) the impact of automatic stabilizers on the budget assuming full employment.
Monetary and Fiscal Policy
LOS s
Section 3.3.1
46
All else being equal, if the purchase price of inventory is increasing, a company that accounts for its inventory under last-in, first-out (LIFO) instead of first-in, first-out (FIFO) is most likely
to have a:
A
higher debt-to-equity ratio.
B
lower net cash flow from operating activities.
C
lower market valuation of its common equity.
A is correct. With rising costs of inventory, a company using LIFO compared with FIFO will report a higher cost of sales and lower profits. This scenario will result in lower increments to retained earnings and a higher debt-to-equity ratio.
B is incorrect. A company using LIFO will report lower taxes paid and a higher net cash flow from operating activities.
C is incorrect. The higher cash flows under LIFO due to lower income taxes paid will increase its market value relative to an identical company that uses FIFO.
Inventories
LOS l, d
Sections 3.7, 4
47
Which of the following best describes common equity?
A
The initial investment by common shareholders in the company
B
The resources owned or controlled by a company
C
The residual interest in a company’s assets after deducting its liabilities
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
27
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
C is correct. Common equity is a component of the balance sheet and represents the owners’ residual interest in the company’s assets after deducting its liabilities.
A is incorrect. Common equity includes the initial investment by the shareholders and the retained earnings; this definition is incomplete.
B is incorrect. Assets are a component of the balance sheet and represent resources controlled by an enterprise as a result of past events and from which future economic benefits to the enterprise are expected to flow.
Understanding Balance Sheets
LOS a
Section 2
48
The cumulative amount of earnings recognized on a company’s income state-
ments that have not been distributed as dividends to the company’s owners is best
described as:
A
retained earnings.
B
accumulated other comprehensive income.
C
dividends payable.
A is correct. Retained earnings, a component of equity, is defined as the cumulative amount of earnings recognized on the company’s income statements that have not been distributed as dividends to the company’s owners.
B is incorrect. Other comprehensive income is also a component of equity, but it is defined as items of comprehensive income not reported on the income statement.
C is incorrect. Dividends payable represent dividends that have been declared but not yet paid. Not all earnings not yet paid out would be accrued as a liability: only those that have been declared as dividends.
Understanding Balance Sheets
LOS f
Section 6.1
49
Income statements for two companies (A and B) and the common-size income statement for the industry are provided in the following table:
($ thousands)
Company A
Company B
Industry
Sales
$10,500
$8,250
100.0%
Cost of goods sold
6,353
5,239
62.8%
Selling, general, and administra-
tive expenses
2,625
2,021
24.8%
Interest expense
840
536
7.0%
Pretax earnings
683
454
5.4%
Taxes
205
145
1.7%
Net earnings
$478
$309
3.7%
The best
conclusion an analyst can make is that:
A
Company A earns a higher gross margin than both Company B and the industry.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
28
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
B
both companies’ tax rates are higher than the industry average.
C
Company B’s interest rate is lower than the industry average.
A is correct. Common-sized analysis of the income statements shows that Company A has a lower percentage cost of goods sold and thus a higher gross margin than the industry and Company B.
Company A
Company B
Industry
Company A
Company B
Sales
$10,500
$8,250
100.0%
100%
100%
Cost of goods sold
6,353
5,239
62.8%
60.5%
63.5%
Gross margin
37.2%
39.5%
36.5%
Company A earns a higher gross margin than both Company B and the industry.
Company A
Company B
Industry
Company A
Company B
Pretax earnings
$683
$454
5.4%
6.5%
5.5%
Taxes
205
145
1.7%
2.0%
1.8%
Tax rate = Taxes/
Pretax earnings
32%
30%
32%
The tax rates for the companies are not higher than the industry.
The tax rates for the companies are not higher than the industry. The interest rate is not a function of sales and cannot be analyzed on a common-size income statement. Tax rates are determined based on Taxes/Pretax earnings, not as a percentage of sales (as shown in common-size analysis).
B is incorrect. Tax rate varies with the pretax income, and as shown in the table neither companies’ tax rate is above the industry average.
C is incorrect. Although Company B’s interest rate as a percentage of sales is lower than the industry average, interest cost does not vary with sales, but with the level of debt and its risk, so the actual interest rate cannot be determined.
Understanding Income Statements
LOS k
Section 7
Financial Analysis Techniques
LOS b, c
Sections 3.1, 3.2.2
50
The following selected balance sheet and ratio data are available for a company:
Metric
Current Year
Previous Year
Cash and cash equivalents
98.0
Marketable securities
389.2
Accounts receivables
12.0
Other current assets
120.1
Total current assets
619.3
Deferred revenues
85.0
Other current liabilities
92.3
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
29
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
Metric
Current Year
Previous Year
Total current liabilities
177.3
Cash ratio
2.37
Quick ratio
2.97
Current ratio
3.27
Which of the following ratios most likely decreased this year?
A
Quick
B
Current
C
Cash
A is correct.
Metric
Current Year
Previous Year
Conclusion
Cash ratio = (Cash + Marketable securities)/Current liabilities
(98 + 389.2)/177.3 = 2.75
2.37
Increase
Quick ratio = (Cash + Marketable securities + Receivables)/Current liabilities
(98 + 389.2 + 12)/177.3 = 2.82
2.97
Decrease
Current ratio = Current assets/
Current liabilities
619.3/177.3 = 3.49
3.27
Increase
B is incorrect. The current ratio increased in the current year.
C is incorrect. The cash ratio increased in the current year.
Understanding Balance Sheets
LOS h
Section 7.2
Financial Analysis Techniques
LOS b
Section 4.3
51
The following items are from a company’s cash flow statement.
Classification of Cash Flow
Description
Amount (£ thousands)
Operating activities
Cash received from customers
55,000
Investing activities
Interest and dividends received
10,000
Financing activities
Net repayment of revolving credit loan
12,000
Which of the following standards and formats did the company most likely
use in the preparation of its financial statements?
A
Either IFRS or US GAAP, direct format
B
IFRS, indirect format
C
IFRS, direct format
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
30
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
C is correct. The direct method of cash flow statement presentation shows the specific cash inflows and outflows that result in reported cash flow from operating activities (e.g., cash from customers and cash to suppliers). Companies using IFRS can decide to report interest and dividend receipts as either an investing or operating activity; under US GAAP, they must report such income as an operating activity. The listed operating and invest-
ment activities indicate that the company reports under IFRS using the direct method.
A is incorrect. The description of investing activities, which includes interest and dividends received, indicates that the company must be reporting under IFRS. Those items are operating activities under US GAAP.
B is incorrect. The description of operating activities indicates that the company is using the direct method.
Understanding Cash Flow Statements
LOS c, d
Sections 2.3, 2.3.2, 3.2.1.5
52
If a company capitalizes an expenditure related to capital assets instead of expensing it, ignoring taxes, the company will most likely
report:
A
a lower cash flow per share in that period.
B
the same free cash flow to the firm (FCFF) in that period.
C
a higher earnings per share in future periods.
B is correct. The FCFF [Cash flow from operations (CFO) + Interest × (1 – t
) – Capital expenditures] would be the same. CFO and capital expenditures would both increase by the same amount (ignoring taxes). Therefore, the net effect on FCFF would be zero.
Example
Capitalizing delivery cost as opposed to expensing it
Ignoring taxes
FCFF
CFO + Interest × (1 – t
) – Capital expenditures
Capital expenditures
If capitalized, the amount capitalized increases capital expenditures and is recorded as a cash outflow from investing activities
CFO
The CFO will be higher by amount capitalized (i.e., the amount not expensed)
Because capital expenditures and CFO increase by the same amount, ignoring taxes, FCFF is unchanged.
A is incorrect. As indicated, CFO increases in the period of capitalization. Cash flow per share is based on CFO, so it would increase.
C is incorrect. Future EPS will be lower due to the higher future depreciation expense arising from the current capitalization.
Understanding Cash Flow Statements
LOS i
Section 4.3
Long-Lived Assets
LOS a
Section 2.1
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
31
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
53
A company has recently revalued one of its depreciable properties and esti-
mates that its remaining useful life will be another 20 years. The applicable tax rate for all years is 30%, and the revaluation of the property is not recognized for tax purposes. Details related to this asset are provided in the following table:
Original Values and Estimates (millions)
Accounting Purposes
Tax Purposes
Acquisition cost in 2011
£8,000
£8,000
Depreciation, straight line
20 years
8 years
Accumulated depreciation, end of 2013
£1,200
£3,000
Net balance, end of 2013
£6,800
£5,000
Re-estimated Values and Estimates, Start of 2014
Revaluation balance, start of 2014
£10,000
Not applicable
New estimated life
20 years
The deferred tax liability related to this asset (in millions) as at the end of 2014 is closest to:
A
£960.
B
£690.
C
£1,650.
B is correct.
(millions)
Accounting Purposes
Tax Purposes
Revaluation surplus
(£10,000 – £6,800) = £3,200
No revaluation allowed
Depreciation, straight line
20 years
5 years remaining
Start of year balance after revaluation, 2013
£10,000
£5,000
Depreciation, 2013
(£10,000/20 years) = £500
£1,000
Net balance, end of 2013
£9,500
£4,000
Minus revaluation surplus
– £ 3,200
—
Carrying value for pur-
poses of deferred taxes
£6,300
£4,000
Deferred tax liability = 0.30 × (£6,300 – £4,000) = £690
Only the portion of the difference between the tax base and the carrying amount that is not the result of the revaluation is recognized as giving rise to a deferred tax lia-
bility. The portion arising from the revaluation surplus is used to reduce the revaluation surplus in equity.
A is incorrect. It is the tax rate × writeup = 0.30 × 3,200 = 960.
C is incorrect. It is the tax rate × the difference between carrying value and tax base: 0.30 × (9,500 – 4,000) = 1,650.
Income Taxes
LOS c, d, h
Sections 2.2, 6.2
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
32
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
54
The year-end balances in a company’s last-in, first-out (LIFO) reserve are $56.8 million as reported in the company’s financial statements for both 2013 and 2014. For 2014, the measure that will most likely be the same regardless of whether the company uses the LIFO or the first-in, first-out (FIFO) inventory method is the:
A
gross profit margin.
B
amount of working capital.
C
inventory turnover.
A is correct. The LIFO reserve did not change from 2013 to 2014. With no change in the LIFO reserve, cost of goods sold will be the same under both methods. Sales are always the same for both methods, so gross profit margin will be the same for 2014. The FIFO inventory will be higher because the LIFO inventory and LIFO reserve are added to compute FIFO inventory. Because the inventory balances would differ under FIFO, both inventory turnover and the amount of working capital would also differ under FIFO.
B is incorrect. The FIFO inventory would be higher because the LIFO inventory and LIFO reserve are added to compute FIFO inventory. Because the inventory balances would be different under FIFO, net working capital would be different under FIFO.
C is incorrect. The FIFO inventory would be higher because the LIFO inventory and LIFO reserve are added to compute FIFO inventory. Because the inventory balances would be different under FIFO, the inventory turnover would be different under FIFO.
Inventories
LOS e, k, l
Section 4.1
55
The following selected fixed asset information is available for a company:
2016 ($US millions)
Cost: Total property, plant, and equipment (PP&E)
30,815
Accumulated depreciation
16,465
Net PP&E
14,350
Average net PP&E
12,200
Net sales
21,670
Net income
2,705
The company’s fixed asset turnover ratio is
closest
to:
A
1.78.
B
8.01.
C
1.51.
A is correct. The fixed asset turnover ratio for the company is calculated as
Net sales/Average net PP&E = 21,670/12,200 =1.78
B is incorrect. It mistakenly uses net income instead of the net sales: 21,670/2,705 = 8.01.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
33
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
C is incorrect. It mistakenly uses net PP&E year-end instead of the average: 21,670/14,350 = 1.51.
Long-Lived Assets
LOS m
Section 7
56
Which of the following ratios is most likely
to be used as a measure of operating performance?
A
Cash ratio
B
Working capital turnover ratio
C
Defensive interval ratio
B is correct. Activity ratios are typically used to measure operating performance. Working capital turnover is an example of an activity ratio; the defensive interval ratio and cash ratio are liquidity ratios used to measure a company’s ability to meet its short-term obligations.
A is incorrect. The cash ratio is an example of a liquidity ratio.
C is incorrect. The defensive interval ratio is an example of a liquidity ratio.
Financial Analysis Techniques
LOS b
Sections 4.2.1, 4.3.1
57
The following information is available about a company ($ millions):
Year Ended 31 December
2012
2011
Sales
322.8
320.1
Net income
27.2
26.8
Cash flow from operations
15.3
38.1
During 2012, the company most likely
experienced a significant decrease in:
A
inventory, anticipating lower demand for its products in 2013.
B
the proportion of sales made on a cash basis.
C
the proportion of interest-bearing debt relative to trade accounts payable.
B is correct. Sales are nearly the same for the two years. A decrease in the proportion of cash sales implies an increase in the proportion of credit sales, which would increase accounts receivable and decrease cash flow from operations.
A is incorrect. A decrease in inventory would increase cash from operations.
C is incorrect. An increase in payables would increase cash from operations.
Understanding Cash Flow Statements
LOS h
Sections 2.3.1, 3.2.5
58
Selected information from a company’s recent income statement and balance sheets is presented in the following table.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
34
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
Selected Financial Information as of 31 December
(C$ thousands)
2013
2012
Sales
2,240,000
Cost of goods sold (COGS)
1,320,000
Cash and investments
210,700
191,600
Accounts receivable
212,800
201,900
Inventories
63,000
71,500
Accounts payable
129,600
157,200
Other current liabilities
130,700
182,700
The company operates in an industry in which suppliers offer terms of 2/10, net 30. The payables turnover for the average company in the industry is 8.5 times.
Which of the following statements is most
accurate? In 2013, the company, on
average:
A
paid its accounts within the payment terms provided.
B
paid its accounts more promptly than the average firm in the industry.
C
took advantage of early payment discounts.
B is correct. The firm’s days in payables is 39.9 days (see following calculations), so it appears that the firm does not normally take supplier provided discounts (paying in 10 days) or pay its accounts within the 30-day terms provided. However, on average, the company is paying faster than the average firm in the industry (42.9 days).
Payables turnover = Purchases/Average payables = 1,311,500/143,400 = 9.15 times
where:
Purchases = COGS + End inventory – Beginning inventory
= 1,320,000 + (63,000 – 71,500)
= 1,311,500
Average payables = (129,600 + 157,200)/2
= 143,400
Days in payables = 365/Payables turnover ratio
For firm: 365 days/9.15 = 39.9 days
For industry: 365 days/8.5 times = 42.9 days
A is incorrect. On average, the company is exceeding the maximum terms provided of 30 days.
C is incorrect. The firm on average does not take advantage of the early discounts offered or its days in payables would be less than 10 days.
Financial Analysis Techniques
LOS b
Sections 4.2.1, 4.2.2
Working Capital Management
LOS f
Section 2.2
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
35
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
59
The following information is available on a company:
Metric Fixed charge coverage ratio required by debt covenant
3.50
Forecasted interest expense ($ thousands)
800
Forecasted lease payments ($ thousands)
300
Tax rate
30%
The minimum net income (in thousands) that the company must generate to meet its debt covenant requirement is closest
to:
A
$2,750.
B
$1,925.
C
$2,135.
B is correct. The fixed charge coverage ratio is:
Net income
Income tax expense
Interest expense
Lease payme
+
+
+
nts
Interest payments
Lease payments
+
Calculation
$ thousands
Denominator ($ thousands): Interest payments + Lease payments
800 + 300
1,100
Minimum numerator: Net income + Income tax expense + Interest
expense + Lease payments
Denominator × 3.50
3,850
Minus interest expense
–800
Minus lease payments
–300
Income before tax
2,750
Minus income tax expense
2,750 × 30%
–825
Minimum net income
1,925
A is incorrect. This answer incorrectly omits tax expense from the numerator. The answer provided is actually net income before tax as calculated above, not net income.
C is incorrect. This answer incorrectly assumes that the numerator in the ratio is EBIT.
($ thousands)
Minimum numerator (from above): Incorrectly assumed to be EBIT
Denominator × 3.50
3,850
Less: interest expense
–800
Incorrect income before tax
3,050
Less: income tax expense
$3,050 × 30%
–915
Incorrect minimum net income
2,135
Financial Analysis Techniques
LOS b
Section 4.4.1
Non-Current (Long-term) Liabilities
(continued)
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
36
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
LOS k
Section 5
60
Which of the following
best describes a reason a company would acquire the use of equipment through an operating lease rather than by purchase?
A
To take advantage of less costly financing
B
To obtain preferential tax treatment for the lease payments compared with ownership
C
To increase cash from operations
A is correct. Leases can provide less costly financing. Because of the tax and economic advantages enjoyed by lessors, they are often able and willing to offer attractive lease terms resulting in less costly financing to the lessees.
B is incorrect. Lessors (the owners) are normally in a better position to take advantage of tax deductions, such as depreciation and interest.
C is incorrect. Cash from operations would be lower with an operating lease compared to purchasing the asset.
Non-Current (Long-Term) Liabilities
LOS f
Section 3.1
61
An analyst examining the statement of cash flows for possible manipulation is least likely
to be concerned about a(n):
A
cash flow from operations to net income ratio consistently higher than 1.
B
increase in cash from operations arising from a large change in accounts payable.
C
change in the classification of interest paid from an operating cash flow to a financing cash flow.
A is correct. A
cash flow from operations to net income ratio that is consistently higher than 1 indicates that operating cash flow is consistently higher than net income and signals high earnings quality.
B is incorrect. A large increase in accounts payable could mean that a company is trying to artificially increase cash flow from operations by delaying payments to creditors.
C is incorrect. Although this change is allowable, it increases cash flow from oper-
ations, making the company appear healthier, and is likely to be made for this reason.
Financial Reporting Quality
LOS i
Section 4.2.2
62
A company that prepares its financial statements in accordance with IFRS issues £5,000,000 face value 10-year bonds on 1 January 2013 when market interest rates for such bonds are 5.50%. The bonds carry a coupon of 6.50% with interest paid annually on 31 December. The carrying value of the bonds as of 31 December 2014 will be closest
to:
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
37
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
A
£5,316,000.
B
£4,695,000.
C
£5,301,000.
A is correct. There are two ways to determine the value of the bonds on 31 December 2014.
First method:
Calculate the present value (PV) of the cash flows over the remaining eight years at 5.5%:
£5,000,000 × 6.5% × PVA(8 years, 5.5%) + £5,000,000 × PV(8 years, 5.5%) = £5,316,728
Or using a financial calculator:
PMT = £325,000, i
= 5.5%, n
= 8 years, Future value = £5,000,000. Compute PV; PV = £5,316,728.
Second method:
Determine the initial bond proceeds and then the amortization of the premium or discount during the first two years. The initial bond proceeds are determined using a financial calculator:
PMT = £325,000, i
= 5.5%, n
= 10 years, Future value = £5,000,000. Compute PV; PV = £5,376,881.
Using the effective annual interest rate method, which is required under IFRS, to amortize the premium gives the following:
Year
Carrying Amount at Start of Year
Interest Expense at EAI
Interest Payment at Coupon Rate
Amortization of Premium
Carrying Amount at End of Year
2013
5,376,881
295,728
325,000
29,272
5,347,609
2014
5,347,609
294,119
325,000
30,881
£5,316,728
B is incorrect. It confuses the interest expense as the coupon payment and the pay-
ment based on the EAI in the valuation of the bond, so that bond value is at a discount: i.e., 4,640,558 and the discount is amortized
Year
Carrying Amt at Start of Year
Interest Expense at EAI
Interest Payment at Coupon Rate
Amortization of Discount
Carrying Amount at End of Year
2013
4,640,558
301,636
275,000
29,272
4,667,194
2014
4,667,194
303,368
275,000
30,881
4,695,562
C is incorrect. It uses the straight-line method to amortize the premium.
Annual Amortization of Premium = (5,376,881 – 5,000,000)/10 years
= 376,881/10
= 37,688
After 2 years: Carrying Value = 5,376,881 – 2 × 37,688 = 5,301,505.
Non-Current (Long-Term) Liabilities
LOS a, b
Sections 2.1, 2.2
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
38
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
63
Under the International Accounting Standards Board’s (IASB’s) Conceptual Framework, one of the qualitative characteristics of useful financial information is that different knowledgeable users would agree that the information is a faith-
ful representation of the economic events that it is intended to represent. This characteristic is best
described as:
A
understandability.
B
verifiability.
C
comparability.
B is correct. Under the IASB’s Conceptual Framework, verifiability means that different knowledgeable and independent users would agree that the information presented faithfully represents the economic events that it is intended to represent.
A is incorrect. Understandability is the clear and concise presentation of information.
C is incorrect. Comparability allows users to identify and understand similarities and differences of items.
Financial Reporting Standards
LOS d
Section 5.2
64
The following information about a company is provided:
Account
$ thousands
Contributed capital, beginning of the year
50
Retained earnings, beginning of the year
225
Sales revenues earned during the year
450
Investment income earned during the year
5
Total expenses paid during the year
402
Dividends paid during the year
10
Total assets, end of the year
800
Total liabilities (in $ thousands) at the end of the year are closest to:
A
482.
B
487.
C
472.
A is correct. Given Assets = Liabilities + Equity, first calculate ending equity ($318, see calculation in the following table).
$800 = Liabilities + $318
Total liabilities = $482
$ thousands
Contributed capital
50
Initial retained earnings
225
Sales revenues
450
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
39
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
$ thousands
Investment income
5
Total expenses
(402)
Net income for the year
53
Dividends paid
(10)
Increase in retained earnings
43
43
Ending owners’ equity
$318
B is incorrect. It forgets to include the investment income.
Ending equity = 450,000 – 402,000 – 10,000 + 50,000 + 225,000 = 313,000
800,000 – 313,000 = 487,000
C is incorrect. It fails to deduct the dividends. Ending equity = 318,000 +10,000 = 328,000
Total liabilities = 800,000 – 328,000 = 472,000
Financial Reporting Mechanics
LOS c, f
Sections 3.2, 4.2
65
Common-size income statements are shown for three companies in the same industry. Which company is most likely
to have a technically superior product?
Company X
Company Y
Company Z
Revenue
100%
100%
100%
Cost of goods sold
65
50
30
Administrative expenses
20
20
20
Research and development
0
5
30
Advertising expenses
5
15
10
Operating profit
10
10
10
A
Company Z
B
Company Y
C
Company X
A is correct. Company Z has spent the most on research and development and is able to support the highest gross margin (lowest cost of goods sold). It likely has the technically superior product.
B is incorrect. Company Y spends significantly less than Company Z on research and development. It is unlikely to have a technically superior product.
C is incorrect. Company X spends nothing on research and development. It is unlikely to have a technically superior product.
Understanding Income Statements
LOS k
Section 7.1
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
40
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
66
Management’s commentary (also known as management’s discussion and analy-
sis) most likely includes:
A
supplementary information about accounting policies, methods, and estimates.
B
an auditor’s opinion as to the fair presentation of the financial statements.
C
a discussion of significant trends, events, and uncertainties that affect the operating results.
C is correct. Management’s commentary includes a discussion of significant trends, events, and uncertainties that affect the operating results.
A is incorrect. The notes disclose information about the accounting policies, methods, and estimates used to prepare the financial statements.
B is incorrect. The Auditor’s Report includes the auditor’s opinion as to the fair pre-
sentation of the financial statements.
Financial Statement Analysis: An Introduction
LOS c
Section 3.1.6
67
A US company that complies with US GAAP would like to exclude some items in determining non-GAAP financial measures, other than EBIT and EBITDA. Which of the following items may be excluded?
A
For performance measures, items tagged as infrequent that occurred within the past two years
B
Impairment charges for long-lived assets
C
For liquidity measures, litigation costs requiring cash settlement
B is correct. To assist investors in evaluating operating performance, companies often report non-GAAP earnings by excluding asset impairment charges either for long-lived assets, goodwill, or other intangible assets.
A is incorrect because the SEC prohibits the calculation of a non-GAAP performance measure intended to eliminate or smooth items tagged as non-recurring. The period within two years either before or after the reporting date is the relevant time frame for considering whether a charge or gain is a recurring item.
C is incorrect because the SEC prohibits the exclusion of charges or liabilities requiring cash settlement from any non-GAAP liquidity measures other than EBIT and EBITDA.
Financial Reporting Quality
LOS g
Section 4.1
68
Which of the following conditions is most likely
associated with decreased earn-
ings quality? Compared with the prior year, the reporting entity’s earnings:
A
decreased slightly in response to the introduction of conservative account-
ing policies.
B
were similar in magnitude but included a large gain on the sale of a manu-
facturing plant.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
41
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
C
increased slightly because of a reduction in bad debt expense based on more-current experiences.
B is correct. The sale of a manufacturing plant is likely a one-time transaction that will not be sustained in future years. The quality of reported earnings has therefore decreased from the prior year.
A is incorrect. This is an example of decreased financial reporting quality because conservatism, a choice made by management, is making it more difficult to establish expectations for the future. Since the earnings only decreased because of the conser-
vatism, there is no decrease in the underlying earnings quality.
C is incorrect. If the estimates are based on more recent experiences, it does not imply the intent to manipulate earnings and will provide a more faithful representation of the company’s performance.
Financial Reporting Quality
LOS a
Sections 1 and 2.2
69
An analyst is comparing the financial leverage of two companies, A and B, from the same industry.
●
Both companies can borrow at a rate of 4%.
●
The two companies are virtually identical except that Company A leases
essentially all of its premises; Company B owns all of its premises.
●
Company A recorded €15,280 (thousand) of lease expenses in 2015, the cur-
rent year, ending 31 December. The following excerpt is from the notes to its
2015 financial statements:
Note on Leasing Activities: Non-Cancellable Operating Lease Rentals Are Payable on 1 January as Follows:
€ thousands
2016
15,280
2017
15,280
2018
15,280
To facilitate a fair comparison with Company B, the analyst will most likely
adjust (in € thousands) for the operating leases by increasing Company A’s:
A
earnings before tax by €15,280.
B
liabilities by €45,840.
C
liabilities by €44,100.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
42
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
C is correct. Analysts typically adjust for operating leases by treating them as if they were finance leases, including them as a liability measured at present value of future lease payments. In this case, the future lease payments are an annuity due of €15,280 over three years, at 4%. The present value of the annuity is €44,100: 15,280 × PVA
ADV
(three years, 4%) = €44,100.
A is incorrect. This is the nominal value of one lease payment. The analyst would adjust net income by the difference between the operating lease expense and the estimated amount of interest expense and depreciation expense that would be deducted under financing lease treatment.
B is incorrect. This is the nominal value of the future lease payments: 3 × €15,280 = €45,840.
Financial Statement Analysis: Applications
LOS e
Section 6.6
70
The following information is available for a firm:
Market risk premium
7.0%
Risk-free rate
2.0%
Comparable firm return
10.4%
Comparable firm debt-to-equity ratio
1.0
Comparable firm tax rate
40.0%
The firm’s unleveraged beta is closest
to:
A
0.75.
B
1.20.
C
1.05.
A is correct. Find the comparable firm’s beta: (10.4% – 2.0%)/7.0% = 1.20.
Unlever the comparable firm’s beta: β
L,comparable
/[1 + (1 – Tax rate) × Debt-to-equity ratio]
1.20/[1 + (1 – 40%) × 1.0] = 0.75.
B is incorrect because it is the comparable firm’s beta.
C is incorrect because the comparable firm’s beta is computed as 1.68 = (10.4% – 2.0%)/
(7.0% – 2.0%) and then proceeds to the next calculation.
Cost of Capital
LOS h, i
Section 3.3.1, 4.1
71
The acceptance of which of the following capital budgeting projects is most likely
to expose a company to the highest level of uncertainty?
A
Replacement of worn out equipment
B
Expansion projects
C
Newly launched product or services
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
43
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
C is correct. Investments related to new products or services expose the company to even more uncertainties than expansion projects. These decisions are more complex and will involve more people in the decision-making process.
A is incorrect. Replacement of worn out equipment is simply an improvement to the existing project with recurring revenues.
B is incorrect. Investments related to new products or services expose the company to even more uncertainties than expansion projects. These decisions are more complex and will involve more people in the decision-making process
Capital Budgeting
LOS a
Section 2
72
The optimal capital budget for a firm is best described as occurring when the company’s marginal cost of capital is:
A
equal to the investment opportunity schedule.
B
less than the investment opportunity schedule.
C
greater than the investment opportunity schedule.
A is correct. The optimal capital budget occurs when the marginal cost of capital (MCC) intersects with (is equal to) the investment opportunity schedule (IOS).
B is incorrect. The optimal capital budget occurs when the marginal cost of capital (MCC) intersects with (is equal to) the investment opportunity schedule (IOS).
C is incorrect. The optimal capital budget occurs when the marginal cost of capital
(MCC) intersects with (is equal to) the investment opportunity schedule (IOS).
Cost of Capital
LOS d
Section 2.3
73
Financial risk is
least likely
affected by:
A
debentures.
B
dividends.
C
long-term leases.
B is correct. By taking on fixed obligations, such as debt (including debentures) and long- term leases, a company increases its financial risk. Dividends will not increase financial risk.
A is incorrect because the use of debentures (one type of bond) is directly associated with financial risk.
C is incorrect because the use of long-term leases is directly related to financial risk.
Measures of Leverage
LOS a
Section 3.4
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
44
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
74
Which of the following is the least
appropriate method for an external analyst to use to estimate a company’s target capital structure for determining the weighted average cost of capital (WACC)?
A
Using the company’s current capital structure at book value weights
B
Using averages of comparable companies’ capital structure
C
Using statements made by the company’s management regarding capital structure policy
A is correct. An external analyst does not know a company’s actual target capital structure. Consequently, the analyst should rely on market value (not book value) weights for the components of the company’s current capital structure.
B is incorrect: This is an accepted method for an external analyst to estimate a com-
pany’s target capital structure.
C is incorrect: This is an accepted method for an external analyst to estimate a com-
pany’s target capital structure.
Cost of Capital
LOS c
Section 2.2
75
Which is most likely
considered a secondary source of liquidity?
A
Centralized cash management system
B
Trade credit
C
Liquidating long-term assets
C is correct. Liquidating long-term assets is a secondary source of liquidity.
A is incorrect. Centralized cash management system is considered as a primary source of liquidity.
B is incorrect. Trade credit (part of short-term funds) is considered as a primary source of liquidity.
Working Capital Management
LOS a
Sections 2.1.1, 2.1.2
76
Under the stakeholder theory, corporate governance is most consistent with a system of:
A
internal controls and procedures by which individual companies are managed.
B
defined roles for management and the majority shareowner(s).
C
checks and balances to minimize the conflicting interests among shareowners.
A is correct. Corporate governance is the system of internal controls and procedures by which individual companies are managed.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
45
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
B is incorrect. The majority shareholder doesn’t necessarily have a specific role that is defined through corporate governance. Instead, the majority shareholder exercises influence and/or control through voting mechanisms tied to their shareholdings.
C is incorrect. Corporate governance is primarily aimed at managing the conflicting interests between management and external shareholders, not amongst shareholders.
Corporate Governance and ESG: An Introduction
LOS d
Section 2
77
Two mutually exclusive projects have the following cash flows (€) and internal rates of return (IRR):
Project
IRR
Year 0
Year 1
Year 2
Year 3
Year 4
A
27.97%
–2,450
345
849
635
3,645
B
28.37%
–2,450
345
849
1,051
3,175
Assuming a discount rate of 8% annually for both projects, the best decision for the firm to make is to accept:
A
both projects.
B
Project B only.
C
Project A only.
C is correct. The NPV of project A is €1,780.59.
1 780 59
2 450
345
1 08
849
1 08
635
1 08
3 645
1 08
1
2
3
,
.
,
.
.
.
,
.
= -
+
(
)
+
(
)
+
(
)
+
(
)
4
The NPV of Project B is €1,765.36.
1 765 36
2 450
345
1 08
849
1 08
1 051
1 08
3175
1
1
2
3
,
.
,
.
.
,
.
,
.
= -
+
(
)
+
(
)
+
(
)
+
08
4
(
)
Because Project A has a higher NPV and the projects are mutually exclusive, only Project A should be accepted.
A is incorrect because both projects cannot be accepted when the projects are mutually exclusive.
B is incorrect because Project A has a higher NPV.
Capital Budgeting
LOS c, d
Sections 4.1, 4.2, 4.8
78
An investment strategy that focuses on climate change is most likely
following which approach to environmental, social, and governance (ESG) investing?
A
Thematic
B
Best in class
C
Impact
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
46
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
A is correct. A strategy that considers a single factor, such as climate change, is a thematic investment strategy.
B is incorrect. Best-in-class ESG investing focuses on identifying the best ESG scoring companies in each industry.
C is incorrect. Impact investing attempts to achieve targeted social or environmental objectives.
Corporate Governance and ESG: An Introduction
LOS k, j
Section 9.3
79
An investment policy statement’s risk objective states that over a 12- month period, with a probability of 95%, the client’s portfolio must not lose more than 5% of its value. This statement is most likely a(n):
A
total risk objective.
B
relative risk objective.
C
absolute risk objective.
C is correct. The statement is an absolute risk objective because it expresses a maximum loss in value with an associated probability of loss.
A is incorrect because this is an absolute (not total) risk objective because it expresses a maximum loss in value with an associated probability of loss.
B is incorrect because this is an absolute (not relative) risk objective because it expresses a maximum loss in value with an associated probability of loss.
Basics of Portfolio Planning and Construction
LOS c
Section 2.2
80
The top level of a risk management system most likely is:
A
risk governance.
B
strategic analysis or integration.
C
defined policies or procedures.
A is correct. Normally a role of the board of directors of a company, risk governance is where goals and responsibilities are defined and top-level decisions (such as determining the company’s risk tolerance) are made.
B is incorrect because strategic analysis or integration occurs at the end of the process and leads to changes in investment decision-making and firm strategy going forward.
C is incorrect because policies and procedures extend risk governance into the day to day operations of the company.
Risk Management: An Introduction
LOS b
Section 2
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
47
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
81
An investor’s transactions in a mutual fund and the fund’s returns over a four- year period are provided in the following table:
Year
1
2
3
4
New investment at the beginning of the year (US$)
2,500
1,500
1,000
0
Investment return for the year
–20%
65%
–25%
10%
Withdrawal by investor at the end of the year (US$)
0
–500
–500
0
Based on this data, the money-weighted return (or internal rate of return) for the investor is closest
to:
A
2.15%.
B
7.50%.
C
3.96%.
C is correct.
Year
1
2
3
4
Starting balance (US$)
0.00
2,000.00
5,275.00
4,206.25
New investment at the beginning of the year (US$)
2,500.00
1,500.00
1,000.00
0.00
Net balance at the beginning of year (US$)
2,500.00
3,500.00
6,275.00
4,206.25
Investment return for the year
–20%
65%
–25%
10%
Investment gain (loss) (US$)
–500.00
2,275.00
–1,568.75
420.63
Withdrawal by investor at the end of the year (US$)
0.00
–500.00
–500.00
0.00
Balance at the end of year (US$)
2,000.00
5,275.00
4,206.25
4,626.88
The money-weighted return is calculated by solving for i
in the following equation:
2 500
1 500
1
500
1
500
1
4 626 88
1
1
2
3
4
,
,
,
.
=
-
+
(
)
+
-
+
(
)
+
+
(
)
+
+
(
)
i
i
i
i
CF
0
= –2,500
CF
1
= –1,500 (new investment beginning of Year 2)
CF
2
= –500 (withdrawal of 500, end of Year 2; –1,000 new investment beginning Year 3)
CF
3
= –500 (withdrawal of 500, end of Year 3)
CF
4
= 4,626.88 (balance at end of Year 4)
i
= 0.0396
A is incorrect. This is the geometric mean.
1
0 2
1
0 65
1
0 25
1
0 1
1
0 0215
1 4
-
(
)
×
+
(
)
×
-
(
)
×
+
(
)
-
=
.
.
.
.
.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
48
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
B is incorrect. This is the arithmetic mean: (–0.2 + 0.65 – 0.25 + 0.10)/4 = 0.075.
Portfolio Risk and Return: Part I
LOS a
Section 2.1.4
82
Risk that can be attributed to factor(s) that affect a company or industry is best
described as:
A
non-systematic risk.
B
market risk.
C
systematic risk.
A is correct. Risk that is attributable to company-specific or industry-specific factors is referred to as non-systematic risk.
B is incorrect. Market risk is the same as systematic risk. It is due to factors that impact the whole market.
C is incorrect. Systematic risk is the same as market risk. It is due to factors that impact the whole market.
Portfolio Risk and Return: Part II
LOS c
Section 3.1
83
As one moves to the right along an investor’s efficient frontier, a set increase in risk is most likely to lead to:
A
sequentially smaller increases in expected return.
B
consistent increases in expected return.
C
sequentially larger increases in expected return.
A is correct. The increase in return with every unit increase in risk keeps decreasing as one moves from left to right because the slope of the efficient frontier continues to decrease. Thus, investors obtain decreasing increases in returns as they assume more risk.
B is incorrect. The slope of the efficient frontier continues to decrease, leading to smaller incremental returns, not consistent.
C is incorrect. The slope of the efficient frontier continues to decrease, leading to smaller incremental returns, not larger.
Portfolio Risk and Return: Part I
LOS g
Section 5.2
84
Information about a portfolio that consists of two assets is provided below:
Asset
Portfolio Weight
Standard Deviation
A
25%
12%
B
75%
16%
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
49
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
If the correlation coefficient between the two assets is 0.75, the standard devia-
tion of the portfolio is closest
to:
A
15.00%.
B
12.37%.
C
14.39%.
C is correct.
[(0.25
2
× 0.12
2
) + (0.75
2
× 0.16
2
) + (2 × 0.25 × 0.75 × 0.12 × 0.16 × 0.75)]
0.5
= 0.1493 = 14.39%
A is incorrect. It omits the correlation coefficient in calculating the standard deviation: [(0.25
2
× 0.12
2
) + (0.75
2
× 0.16
2
) + (2 × 0.25 × 0.75 × 0.12 × 0.16)]
0.5
= 0.15 = 15%, which is the weighted average standard deviation.
B is incorrect. It omits the third term in the formula in calculating the standard devi-
ation: [(0.25
2
××0.12
2
) + (0.75
2
× 0.16
2
)]
0.5
= 0.1237 = 12.37%.
Portfolio Risk and Return: Part I
LOS e
Sections 4.1.2, 4.1.3
85
In general, which of the following institutions will most likely
have a high need for liquidity and a short investment time horizon?
A
Banks
B
Defined-benefit pension plans
C
Endowments
A is correct. Banks have a short-term horizon and high liquidity needs.
B is incorrect. Defined-benefit pension plans have a long time horizon and low need for liquidity.
C is incorrect. Endowments have a long time horizon and low need for liquidity.
Portfolio Management: An Overview
LOS b
Section 3
86
If the expected return on the market portfolio is 6% and the risk-free rate is 2%, the expected return of a security with a beta of 1.25 is closest
to:
A
7.00%.
B
5.00%.
C
9.50%.
A is correct. The capital asset pricing model posits that the expected return of a security is E
(
R
i
) = R
f
+ β
i
[
E
(
R
m
) – R
f
] where R
f
is the risk-free rate, R
m
is the return on the market portfolio, and β is the beta of the security: 2% + 1.25 × (6% – 2%) = 7.00%.
B is incorrect because it fails to add the risk-free rate: 1.25 × (6% – 2%) = 5.00%.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
50
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
C is incorrect because it fails to subtract the risk-free rate from the market portfolio’s expected return: 2% + 1.25 × (6%) = 9.50%.
Portfolio Risk and Return: Part II
LOS g
Section 3.2.6
87
If the following three stocks are held in a portfolio, the portfolio’s total return on an equal-weighted basis is closest
to:
Stock
Number of Shares Owned
Beginning of Period Price per Share ($)
End of Period Price per Share ($)
Dividend per Share during the Period ($)
A
500
40
37
2.00
B
320
50
52
1.50
C
800
30
34
0.00
A
3.28%.
B
5.94%.
C
6.37%.
B is correct. Equal weighting assigns an equal weight to each constituent security at inception. Therefore, it is the sum of the total return from each security divided by the number of securities in the portfolios.
Stock
(
P
1
– P
0
+ D
)/
P
0
Total Return (%)
A
(37 – 40 + 2.00)/40 =
–2.5
B
(52 – 50 + 1.50)/50 =
7.00
C
(34 – 30 + 0)/30 =
13.33
Portfolio return with equal weighting: (–2.50 + 7.00 + 13.33)/3 =
5.94
A is incorrect. It is computed on a price return basis not total return.
Stock
Price Return (%) = (
P
1
– P
0
)/
P
0
A
(37 – 40)/40 = –7.50
B
(52 – 50)/50 = 4.00
C
(34 – 30)/30 = 13.33
Portfolio return with equal weighting: (–7.50 + 4.00 + 13.33)/3 = 3.28%
C is incorrect. It is the total return on the basis of beginning of period market- capitalization weights.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
51
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
Stock
Total Return (%) = (
P
1
– P
0 + D
)/
P
0
BOP Weights*
Total Return (%) × BOP Weight
A
(37 – 40 + 2.00)/40 = –2.50
0.333
–0.83
B
(52 – 50 + 1.50)/50 = 7.00
0.267
1.87
C
(34 – 30 + 0)/30 = 13.33
0.400
5.33
Portfolio market-capitalization-weighted total return =
6.37
*
BOP weights:
Beginning Value of Portfolio: (A = 500 × $40) + (B = 320 × $50) + (C = 800 × $30) = $60,000;
BOP weights: A = 20,000/60,000 = 0.333; B = 16,000/60,000 = 0.267; C = 24,000/60,000 = 0.400
Security Market Indexes
LOS d, e
Section 3.2.2
88
If the number of financial analysts who follow or analyze a company increases substantially, then the market for this company’s shares will most likely
become:
A
more attractive for active investors.
B
overvalued.
C
more efficient.
C is correct. The number of financial analysts who follow or analyze a security or asset should be positively related to market efficiency. Therefore, if more analysts cover a company, the market for this company’s shares will most likely become more efficient.
A is incorrect. In a more efficient market, less profitable trading opportunities exist and as a consequence, it becomes less attractive for active investors.
B is incorrect. In a more efficient market, prices should converge toward fair value.
Market Efficiency
LOS c
Section 2.3
89
A corporate manager pursuing a low-cost strategy will most likely
:
A
engage in offering products of unique quality or type.
B
have strong market research teams for product development and marketing.
C
invest in productivity-improving capital equipment.
C is correct. A corporate manager pursuing a cost leadership strategy must be able to invest in productivity-improving capital equipment for achieving cost controls and being able to offer products and services at lower prices than the competition.
A is incorrect. Offering products that are unique either in quality, type, or means of distribution is suitable for differentiation strategies.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
52
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
B is incorrect. Having strong market research teams for product development and marketing is suitable for differentiation strategies.
Introduction to Industry and Company Analysis
LOS k
Section 6
90
For a US investor, which of the following statements concerning investing in depository receipts (DRs) is least accurate?
A
Investing in DRs could provide arbitrage opportunities and entail currency risk.
B
Investors in unsponsored DRs would have the same voting rights as the direct owners of common shares.
C
Sponsored DRs are subject to greater reporting requirements than unspon-
sored DRs.
B is correct. Investors of unsponsored DRs would not have the same voting rights as the direct owners of common shares because the depository bank retains the voting rights.
A is incorrect because it is an accurate statement. The DRs trading on multiple exchanges could experience short-term valuation discrepancies, potentially giving rise to a quick arbitrage profit opportunity for astute traders to exploit. The price of each DR will be affected by factors that affect the price of the underlying shares and exchange rate movements.
C is incorrect because it is an accurate statement. Sponsored DRs are subject to greater reporting requirements than unsponsored DRs. In the United States, sponsored DRs must be registered with the SEC.
Overview of Equity Securities
LOS a, b
Section 5.2
91
Industry analysis is least
useful to those who are engaged in:
A
a top-down investment approach.
B
indexing and passive investing strategies.
C
portfolio performance attribution.
B is correct. Indexing and passive investing strategies would not engage in over- or underweighting of industries, industry rotation, or timing investments in industries. Therefore, industry analysis is not useful to such investors or portfolio managers.
A is incorrect. In a top-down investing approach, industry analysis is useful to identify industries with positive, neutral, or negative outlooks for profitability and growth, which will then help weighting of industries relative to the benchmark.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
53
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
C is incorrect. Portfolio performance attribution, which addresses the sources of a portfolio’s returns, usually in relation to the portfolio’s benchmark, includes industry or sector selection.
Introduction to Industry and Company Analysis
LOS a
Section 2
92
Which of the following statements about the forms of market efficiency is least
accurate? If the form of market efficiency is:
A
weak, then investment strategies based on fundamental analysis could achieve abnormal returns.
B
semi-strong, then security prices fully reflect all past market data.
C
strong, then prices reflect only private information.
C is correct. If markets are strong-form efficient, prices reflect not only private information but also past market data and public information. If markets are weak-form efficient, investment strategies based on fundamental analysis of public information and past market data could achieve abnormal returns. The semi-strong-form of market efficiency also encompasses the weak form. Therefore, security prices reflect not only publicly known and available information but also all past market data.
A is incorrect. This statement is correct because if markets are weak-form efficient only, investment strategies based on fundamental analysis could achieve abnormal returns.
B is incorrect. This statement is correct because the semi-strong-form of market efficiency also encompasses the weak-form; therefore, security prices reflect not only publicly known and available information but also all past market data.
Market Efficiency
LOS e, d
Section 3
93
An investor borrows the maximum amount allowed by the initial margin requirement of 40% to purchase 100 shares of a stock selling at $60 per share. If the investor sells the stock when its price increases to $70 per share, her return before commissions and interest will be
closest
to:
A
41.7%.
B
27.8%.
C
16.7%.
A is correct.
Investor’s return (%) = Market value of the stock
Loan
Investor's equity
−
−
1
= 70
100
60
100
0 6
60
100
0 4
1
×
(
)
-
×
×
(
)
×
×
(
)
-
.
.
= 41.67%
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
54
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
B is incorrect It takes margin as 60%.
= 70
100
60
100
0 4
60
100
0 6
1
×
(
)
-
×
×
(
)
×
×
(
)
-
.
.
= 27.78%
C is incorrect It ignores the margin.
= 100
70
60
100
60
×
-
(
)
×
= 16.67%
Market Organization and Structure
LOS f
Section 5
94
The following market information relates to a company:
Market price per share
$37.80
Number of shares outstanding
1,000,000
Net income
$5,250,000
Total common equity
$35,000,000
Total annual dividend paid
$1,512,000
Risk-free rate
2.60%
Market risk premium
8.00%
Beta
1.05
Using the capital asset pricing model (CAPM), the company’s cost of equity is closest to:
A
15.0%.
B
12.4%.
C
11.0%.
C is correct. Using the CAPM: Cost of equity = Risk-free rate + (Beta × Market risk premium)
= 2.6 + (1.05 × 8) = 11%
B is incorrect. It is the Dividend yield + (Beta × Market risk premium)
Dividend per share = 1,512,000/1,000,000 = 1.512
Dividend yield = 1.512/37.8 = 4%
Cost of equity (with the mistake) = 4% + (1.05 × 8) = 12.4%
A is incorrect. It is the Return on equity = Net income/Common equity
ROE = 5,250,000/35,000,000
= 15%
Overview of Equity Securities
LOS h
Section 7.2
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
55
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
Equity Valuation: Concepts and Basic Tools
LOS g
Section 4
95
Which of the following statements about peer groups is most accurate? A peer group is constructed through a process:
A
that starts with an existing commercially classified system that is then narrowed.
B
that locates a group of companies whose valuation is influenced by diverse factors.
C
where management should refrain from participating to maintain objectivity in the process.
A is correct. The process consists of initially examining commercial classification systems and then refining it to the companies operating in the chosen industry.
B is incorrect because the process includes looking for similar, not diverse, factors.
C is incorrect because management should be part of the process.
Introduction to Industry and Company Analysis
LOS d
Section 4.4
96
Assume the current dividend of a security is $9.50. The dividend is expected to grow by 12% each year for two years and then 3% afterwards. The required rate of return is 15%. The security’s value is closest to:
A
$95.58.
B
$120.51.
C
$94.99.
A is correct. The value of the security is:
D
0
= $9.50
D
1
= $9.50 × (1 + 0.12) = $10.64
D
2
= $9.50 × (1 + 0.12)
2
= $11.92
D
3 = $9.50 × (1 + 0.12)
2
× (1 + 0.03) = $12.27
V
2
= $
.
.
.
12 27
0 15
0 03
−
V
0
= $
.
.
$
.
.
$
.
.
$
.
10 64
1
0 15
11 92
1
0 15
102 25
1
0 15
95 58
2
2
+
(
)
+
+
(
)
+
+
(
)
≅
B is incorrect; it takes the discounted values from V
0
but doesn’t discount D
3
.
V
0
= $
.
.
$
.
.
$
.
$
.
10 64
1
0 15
11 92
1
0 15
102 25
120 51
2
+
(
)
+
+
(
)
+
≅
9.25 + 9.01 + $102.25 = $120.51
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
56
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
C is incorrect; it takes the security value and adds dividend 0 (
D
0
): 85.49 + $9.50 = $94.99.
Equity Valuation: Concepts and Basic Tools
LOS g
Section 4.3
97
Which of the following best describes an advantage of the EV/EBITDA multiple for valuing equity? An advantage is that:
A
the multiple must be positive.
B
it does not require the market value of debt.
C
EBITDA is a proxy for operating cash flow.
C is correct. An advantage of EBITDA is that it is a proxy for operating cashflow because it excludes depreciation and amortization.
A is incorrect. The multiple can be negative if EBITDA is negative.
B is incorrect. The market value of debt is needed in valuing the equity since it should be deducted from the enterprise value and may be difficult to obtain.
Equity Valuation: Concepts and Basic Tools
LOS m
Section 5.4
98
Which of the following transactions is most likely to affect a company’s financial leverage ratio?
A
Payment of a 9% stock dividend
B
An increase in cash dividends paid
C
Completion of a previously announced 1-for-20 reverse stock split
B is correct. Cash dividends affect a company’s capital structure and financial leverage ratios by reducing assets and shareholders’ equity.
A is incorrect. Neither stock splits nor stock dividends affect a firm’s financial leverage ratio.
C is incorrect. Neither stock splits nor stock dividends affect a firm’s financial leverage ratio.
Equity Valuation: Concepts and Basic Tools
LOS a
Section 4.1
99
Credit spreads are most likely
to narrow during:
A
economic contractions.
B
a period of flight to quality.
C
economic expansions.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
57
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
C is correct. Credit spreads narrow during economic expansions and widen during economic contractions. During an economic expansion, corporate revenues and cash flows rise, making it easier for corporations to service their debt, and investors purchase corporates instead of Treasuries, causing spreads to narrow.
A is incorrect. Credit spreads narrow during economic expansions and widen during economic contractions.
B is incorrect. During a flight to quality investors sell corporate and buy treasuries thereby widening the credit spread on corporates.
Fundamentals of Credit Analysis
LOS h
Section 6
100
Which of the following is least likely
a short-term funding method available to banks?
A
Central bank funds
B
Negotiable certificate of deposits
C
Syndicated loans
C is correct. A syndicated loan is a loan from a group of lenders, called the “syndicate,” to a single borrower. Syndicated loans are primarily originated by banks, and the loans are extended to companies but also to governments and government-related entities.
A is incorrect because central bank funds are one of the short-term wholesale funds available to banks for short-term funding needs.
B is incorrect because a negotiable CD allows any depositor (initial or subsequent) to sell the CD in the open market prior to the maturity date. CDs are an important source of funds for financial institutions.
Fixed-Income Markets: Issuance, Trading, and Funding
LOS h
Section 7
101
In the securitization process, which of the following is most likely
a third party to the transaction? The:
A
seller of the collateral.
B
special purpose entity.
C
financial guarantor.
C is correct. In the securitization process, the seller of the collateral, the special purpose entity, and the servicer of the loan are the main parties. All other parties, including independent accountants, lawyers/attorneys, trustees, underwriters, rating agencies, and financial guarantors are third parties to the transaction.
A is incorrect because in the securitization process the seller of the collateral is one of the main parties to the transaction.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
58
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
B is incorrect because in the securitization process the special purpose entity is one of the main parties to the transaction.
Introduction to Asset-Backed Securities
LOS b
Section 3.2
102
Consider bonds that have the same yield to maturity and maturity. The bond with the greatest reinvestment risk is most likely the one selling at:
A
a premium.
B
par.
C
a discount.
A is correct. Yield to maturity is based on the assumption that a bond is held to maturity, does not default, and has its coupon payments reinvested at the yield to maturity. The bond selling at a premium has the highest coupon rate and is expected to earn the most reinvestment income from reinvesting those coupon payments at the yield to maturity. If the reinvestment rate falls, this bond will suffer the greatest loss.
B is incorrect because the bond selling at par has a lower coupon rate than the bond selling at a premium.
C is incorrect because the bond selling at a discount has a lower coupon rate than the bond selling at a premium.
Understanding Fixed-Income Risk and Return
LOS a
Section 2
103
On 15 December 2013, Alpha Corp. issued a 10-year callable bond paying an annual coupon of 8%. The bond is callable in whole or in part at any time after 15 December 2018. This type of callable bond is most likely referred to as:
A
American style.
B
European style.
C
Bermuda style.
A is correct. An American-style callable bond is a bond in which the issuer has the right to call the bonds at any time starting on the first call date.
B is incorrect because in a European-style callable bond the issuer has the right to call the bonds only once on the call date.
C is incorrect because a callable bond where the issuer has the right to call the bonds on specified dates after the call protection period has elapsed is a Bermuda-style callable bond.
Fixed-Income Securities: Defining Elements
LOS f
Section 3.1
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
59
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
104
In a rising interest rate environment, the effective duration of a putable bond relative to an otherwise identical non-putable bond, will most likely
be:
A
higher.
B
lower.
C
the same.
B is correct. When interest rates are rising, the put option becomes more valuable to the investor. The ability to sell the bond at par value limits the price depreciation as rates rise. So, the presence of an embedded put option reduces the sensitivity of the bond price to changes in interest rates, resulting in a lower effective duration.
A is incorrect because in a rising interest rate environment the effective duration of a putable bond will be lower, not higher, than the effective duration of a comparable non-putable bond.
C is incorrect because in a rising interest rate environment the effective duration of a putable bond will be lower than the effective duration of a comparable non-putable bond.
Understanding Fixed-Income Risk and Return
LOS f
Section 3.3
105
Which of the following is least likely
to be a negative covenant associated with a coupon-paying corporate bond issue?
A
A requirement to pay withholding taxes to foreign governments in a timely manner
B
A prohibition from investing in long-term projects in emerging market countries
C
A requirement to hedge at least 50% of the firm’s revenues generated from foreign sales
A is correct. Requiring compliance with the existing rules and regulations of foreign governments is administrative in nature and thus an affirmative covenant.
B is incorrect because this is a negative covenant that is likely to materially constrain the firm’s operational decisions and is likely to be costly to the firm.
C is incorrect because this is a negative covenant that is likely to materially constrain the firm’s operational decisions and is likely to be costly to the firm.
Fixed-Income Securities: Defining Elements
LOS c
Section 3.1
106
The bonds of Apex Corporations have a par value of $10,000 each and an annual required rate of return of 10%. The bonds make quarterly coupon pay-
ments at an annual rate of 6% and have two years remaining until maturity. The current market price of each bond is closest
to:
A
$10,749.
B
$9,283.
C
$9,306.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
60
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
B is correct. Using the quarterly coupon payment of $150 [= (0.06 × 10000)/4] over eight quarters and a quarterly required rate of return of 2.5%, we calculate the bond’s price as:
P
0
= 150/(1.025)
1
+ 150/(1.025)
2
+ ... + 150/(1.025)
8
+ 10,000/(1.025)
8
= $9,282.99
A is incorrect because the bond’s price is computed using a quarterly coupon payment of $250 [= (0.10 × 10000)/4] and a quarterly required rate of return of 1.5%:
P
0
= 250/(1.015)
1
+ 250/(1.015)
2
+ ... + 250/(1.015)
8
+ 10000/(1.015)
8
= $10,748.59
C is incorrect because the bond’s price is computed using the annual coupon payment of $600 [= (0.06 × 10,000)] over 2 years and the annual required rate of return of 10%:
P
0
= 600/(1.10)
1
+ (600 + 10,000)/(1.10)
2
= $9,305.79
Introduction to Fixed-Income Valuation
LOS a
Section 2.1
107
Which type of fixed-income security is most likely
to have coupon payments that reset periodically?
A
Callable bonds
B
Floating-rate notes
C
Convertible bonds
B is correct. A floating-rate bond does not have a fixed coupon rate over its life. Instead, its coupon payments reset periodically according to some reference rate, such as the one-month London interbank offered rate (Libor).
A is incorrect because a callable bond gives issuers the ability to retire debt prior to maturity. It does not have a feature of resetting coupon payments periodically according to the reference rate.
C is incorrect because a convertible bond gives the bondholder the right to convert the bond into a specified number of shares of the issuer’s common shares.
Fixed-Income Markets: Issuance, Trading, and Funding
LOS b, g
Sections 2.1 and 6.3
108
The semiannual bond equivalent yield spot rates for US Treasury yields are provided below.
Period
Years
Spot Rate
1
0.5
1.20%
2
1.0
2.10%
3
1.5
2.80%
4
2.0
3.30%
On a semiannual bond equivalent yield (BEY) basis, the six-month forward rate one year from now is closest to
:
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
61
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
A
4.21%.
B
3.64%.
C
2.10%.
A is correct. The x
-year forward rate y
years from now is x
y
x
y
x
y
y
y
f
z
z
=
+
(
)
+
(
)
-
+
+
1
1
1
All spot rates are given on a BEY basis and must be divided by 2 in this calculation:
0 5
1 0
3
2
1
0 028 2
1
0 021 2
1
0 021036
.
.
.
.
.
f
=
+
(
)
+
(
)
-
=
On a BEY basis, the forward rate is 0.021036 × 2 = 4.21%.
B is incorrect because it calculates the 1-year forward rate six months from now.
C is incorrect because it doesn’t convert to a semiannual bond equivalent yield basis.
Introduction to Fixed-Income Valuation
LOS h
Section 4
109
Treasury spot rates on a semiannual bond equivalent yield basis are provided below.
Maturity
Semiannual Bond Equivalent Yield
0.5 years
0.40%
1.0 years
0.80%
1.5 years
1.00%
2.0 years
1.10%
2.5 years
1.20%
Using these spot rates, the value of a 2.5-year Treasury security that makes semiannual payments based on a 2% coupon rate is closest to
:
A
101.98.
B
106.88.
C
99.06.
A is correct. The value of the bond is
1
1 002
1
1 004
1
1 005
1
1 0055
101
1 006
0 9980
0 9920
0
1
2
3
4
5
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
+
+
+
+
=
+
+
.
.
.
.
9851
0 9783
98 0238
101 98
+
+
=
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
62
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
B is incorrect because it discounts all cash flows at the 2.5-spot rate and uses the annual coupon rate instead of the semi-annual:
2
1 006
2
1 006
2
1 006
2
1 006
102
1 006
1 9881
1 9762
1
1
2
3
4
5
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
+
+
+
+
=
+
+
9644
1 9527
98 9943
106 88
+
+
=
.
.
.
C is incorrect because it fails to divide the spot rates by 2 as required because they are presented on a bond-equivalent yield basis:
1
1 004
1
1 008
1
1 01
1
1 011
101
1 012
0 9960
0 9842
0 9
1
2
3
4
5
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
+
+
+
+
=
+
+
706
0 9572
95 1522
99 06
+
+
=
.
.
.
Introduction to Fixed-Income Valuation
LOS c
Section 2.4
110
A bond’s duration is 7.31, and its convexity is –24.85. Using the duration model with convexity adjustment, the bond’s percentage change in price if interest rates decrease 2% is closest to
:
A
15.12%.
B
15.60%.
C
14.12%.
C is correct. The duration model estimates the percentage change in price as –AnnModDur × ΔYield, or –7.31 × (–0.02)= +14.62%, and the convexity adjustment is ½ × AnnConvexity × (∆Yield)
2
, or ½ × (–24.85) × (0.02)
2
= –0.50%, and 14.62% – 0.50% = 14.12%.
A is incorrect because it uses –
C
× ∆
i
as the convexity adjustment or –24.85 × –0.02 = 0.50% and 14.62% + 0.50% = 15.12%.
B is incorrect because it uses –
C
× (∆
i
)
2
× 100 or –24.85 × (0.02)
2
× 100 = +0.98% as the convexity adjustment and 14.62% + 0.98% = 15.60%.
Understanding Fixed-Income Risk and Return
LOS i
Section 3.6
111
For a forward contract with a value of zero, a situation where the spot price is above the forward price is best
explained by high:
A
interest rates.
B
storage costs.
C
convenience yield.
C is correct. If the convenience yield is high, holding the underlying confers large benefits, thus the spot price can exceed the forward price for a forward contract with a value of zero. Based on the formula
V
t
(
T
) = S
t
– (γ – θ)(1 + r
)
t
– F
0
(
T
)(1 + r
)
–(
T
–
t
)
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
63
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
and an initial value V
t
(0) of zero, large benefits γ explain why the spot price can exceed the forward price.
A is incorrect. High interest rates make the forward contract more valuable. Thus the forward rate is above the spot rate.
B is incorrect. High storage costs make the forward contract more valuable. Thus the forward rate is above the spot rate.
Basics of Derivative Pricing and Valuation
LOS d
Section 2.2.5
112
According to put–call–forward parity, if the put in a protective put with for-
ward contract expires out of the money, the payoff is most likely
equal to:
A
the market value of the underlying asset.
B
zero.
C
the face value of a risk-free bond.
A is correct. A protective put with forward contract is defined as a long position in (1) a bond that has the face value equal to the forward contract, (2) a forward contract, and (3) a long position in a put. If the put expires out of the money, the value of the overall
position is equal to the market value of the asset.
+
F
0
(
t
)
(payoff of bond)
+
S
T
– F
0
(
t
)
(payoff of forward)
+ 0
(payoff of option)
= S
T
(payoff of strategy)
B is incorrect. Zero is the payoff of the put alone. This ignores the other positions in the strategy.
C is incorrect. The face value of the risk-free bond is the payoff of the protective put with forward contract if the put expires in the money
Basics of Derivative Pricing and Valuation
LOS m
Section 4.1.10
113
A derivative can best be described as a financial instrument that:
A
duplicates the underlying asset’s performance.
B
transforms the underlying asset’s performance.
C
passes through the underlying asset’s returns.
B is correct. The best characterization of a derivative is that it typically transforms the underlying asset’s performance.
A is incorrect. A derivative transforms the performance of the underlying asset rather than duplicating the performance of the underlying asset.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
64
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
C is incorrect. A derivative transforms the performance of the underlying asset rather than passing through the returns of the underlying asset.
Derivative Markets and Instruments
LOS a
Section 2
114
In a credit default swap, the party that receives a series of cash payments in return for promising to pay compensation for credit losses resulting from a third party’s default is most likely
the:
A
clearinghouse.
B
seller of the swap.
C
buyer of the swap.
B is correct. A credit default swap is a derivatives contract between a credit protection buyer and a credit protection seller in which the seller receives a series of cash payments from the buyer in return for a promise of compensation for credit losses resulting from a third party’s default.
A is incorrect. A credit default swap is a derivatives contract between a credit protection buyer and a credit protection seller in which the seller (not the clearinghouse) receives a series of cash payments from the buyer in return for a promise of compensation for credit losses resulting from a third party’s default.
C is incorrect. A credit default swap is a derivatives contract between a credit pro-
tection buyer and a credit protection seller in which the seller (not the buyer) receives a series of cash payments from the buyer in return for a promise of compensation for credit losses resulting from a third party’s default.
Derivative Markets and Instruments
LOS c
Section 4.2.2
115
A swap that involves the exchange of a fixed payment for a floating payment is most likely
equivalent to a series of:
A
off-market forward contracts.
B
forward contracts that all have an initial positive value.
C
forward contracts that all have an initial value equal to the fixed payment.
A is correct. Because the cost of carrying an asset over different time periods will vary, the values of the implicit forward contracts embedded in the swap will not be equal: some may be positive, and some may be negative. Off-market forward contracts satisfy this condition because they can be set at any value.
B is incorrect. Because the initial market value of the swap is zero by definition, it cannot be replicated by a series of forward contracts with an initial positive value.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
65
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
C is incorrect. Because the cost of carrying an asset over different time periods will vary, the prices of the implicit forward contracts embedded in the swap cannot all be equal.
Basics of Derivative Pricing and Valuation
LOS g
Section 3.3
116
Which of the following most likely
belongs in an alternative asset category?
A
A limited partnership that takes long and short positions in publicly traded equity.
B
Equity in an emerging market company that is traded over-the-counter.
C
Securitized commercial real estate debt.
A is correct. A limited partnership that takes long and short positions in publicly traded equity is one type of hedge fund, a category of alternative assets.
B is incorrect because traded equity, even equity that is traded over the counter, is a part of the traditional equity asset category.
C is incorrect because securitized real estate debt (i.e., CMBS and RMBS) are part of the publicly traded debt universe, which is not an alternative asset.
Introduction to Alternative Investments
LOS b
Section 2.1
117
High Plains Capital is a hedge fund with a portfolio valued at $475,000,000 at the beginning of the year. One year later, the value of assets under management is $541,500,000. The hedge fund charges a 1.5% management fee based on the end-of-year portfolio value as well as a 10% incentive fee. If the incentive fee and management fee are calculated independently, the effective return for a hedge fund investor is closest
to:
A
12.29%.
B
10.89%.
C
11.06%.
B is correct. Management fee = $541,500,000 × 0.015 = $8,122,500
Incentive fee = ($541,500,000 – $475,000,000) × 0.10 = $6,650,000
Total fees = $14,772,500
Return = ($541,500,000 – $475,000,000 – $14,772,500)/$475,000,000 = 0.1089 or 10.89%
A is incorrect because only the management fee is included in the return calculation.
Return = ($541,500,000 – $475,000,000 – $8,122,500)/$475,000,000 = 0.1229 or 12.29%
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
66
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
C is incorrect. The incentive fee is incorrect. It is incorrectly calculated as follows:
Incentive fee = ($541,500,000 – $475,000,000 – $8,122,500) × 0.10 = $5,837,750
Total fees = $13,960,250 = $8,122,500 + $5,837,750
Return = ($541,500,000 – $475,000,000 – $13,960,250)/$475,000,000 = 0.1106 or 11.06%
Introduction to Alternative Investments
LOS f
Section 3.3.1
118
Collectibles are least likely
to provide:
A
long-term capital appreciation.
B
portfolio diversification.
C
current income.
C is correct. Collectibles do not provide current income, but they can potentially provide long-term capital appreciation and help further diversify a portfolio.
A is incorrect. Collectibles can potentially provide long-term capital appreciation.
B is incorrect. Collectibles can potentially provide portfolio diversification.
Introduction to Alternative Investments
LOS d
Section 7
119
Which of the following hedge fund strategies emphasizes a top-down approach?
A
Macro
B
Equity hedge
C
Event-driven
A is correct. Macro hedge funds emphasize a “top down” approach to identify economic trends and trade on expected movements in economic variables.
B is incorrect because equity hedge funds use a “bottom up” approach and employ strategies, such as market neutral, which uses quantitative (technical) and/or fundamental analysis to identify under- and overvalued equity securities at the company level.
C is incorrect because event-driven strategies typically seek to profit from potential changes in the corporate structure of individual companies. This strategy is considered “bottom up” where the analysis starts at the company level, as opposed to a “top down” approach which starts with macroeconomic analysis.
Introduction to Alternative Investments
LOS d
Section 3.1.1, 3.1.3
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
67
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
120
A hedge fund with $225 million of initial capital charges a management fee of 1% and an incentive fee of 10%. The management fee is based on assets under management at year-end, and the incentive fee is calculated independently from the management fee. Assuming the fund earns a 15% return at year-end, total fees earned by the hedge fund during the year are closest to:
A
$5.96 million.
B
$5.70 million.
C
$5.63 million.
A is correct. Total fees earned by the hedge fund are closest to $5.96 million:
Year-end value = $225 million × 1.15 = $258.75 million
Management fee = Year-end value × Management fee %
= $258.75 million × 1% = $2.5875 million
Incentive fee = (Year-end value – Beginning value) × Incentive fee %
= ($258.75 million – $225 million) × 10% = $3.375 million
Total fees = Management fee + Incentive fee
= $2.5875 million + $3.375 million = $5.9625 million = $5.96 million
C is incorrect because $5.63 million results from calculating the management fee based on assets under management at the beginning of the period, rather than the end of the period:
Year-end value = $225 million × 1.15 = $258.75 million
Management fee = Beginning value × Management fee %
= $225 million × 1% = $2.25 million
Incentive fee = (Year-end value – Beginning value) × Incentive fee %
= ($258.75 million – $225 million) × 10% = $3.375 million
Total fees = Management fee + Incentive fee
= $2.25 million + $3.375 million = $5.625 million = $5.63 million
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
68
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) AM
B is incorrect because $5.70 million represents the total fees earned if the incentive fee was calculated net of the management fee as opposed to independently from the management fee:
Year-end value = $225 million × 1.15 = $258.75 million
Management fee = Year-end value × Management fee %
= $258.75 million × 1% = $2.5875 million
Incentive fee = (Year-end value – Beginning value – Management fee) × Incentive fee %
= ($258.75 million – $225 million – $2.5875 million) × 10% = $3.1163 million
Total fees = Management fee + Incentive fee
= $2.5875 million + $3.1163 million = $5.7038 million = $5.70 million
Introduction to Alternative Investments
LOS e
Section 3.3.1
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
T
he afternoon session of the 2018 Level I Chartered Financial Analyst
® Mock
Examination has 120 questions. To best simulate the exam day experience, candidates are advised to allocate an average of one and a half minutes per question for a total of 180 minutes (3 hours) for this session of the exam.
Questions
Topic
Minutes
1–18
Ethical and Professional Standards
27
19–33
Quant
22.5
34–45
Econ
18
46–69
Financial Reporting and Analysis
36
70–78
Corporate Finance
13.5
79–86
Portfolio Management
12
87–98
Equity
18
99–110
Fixed Income
18
111–115
Derivatives
7.5
116–120
Alternative Investments
7.5
Total:
180
By accessing this mock exam, you agree to the following terms of use: This mock exam is provided to currently registered CFA candidates. Candidates may view and print the exam for personal exam prepara-
tion only. The following activities are strictly prohibited and may result in disciplinary and/or legal action: accessing or permitting access by anyone other than currently-registered CFA candidates; copying, posting to any website, emailing, distributing and/or reprinting the mock exam for any purpose
© 2017 CFA Institute . All rights reserved.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
2
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
2018 LEVEL I MOCK EXAM (B) PM
1
Claire Jones, CFA, is an analyst following natural gas companies in the United States. At an industry energy conference, the CFO of Alpine Energy states they are interested in making strategic acquisitions. At a separate event, Alpine’s head of exploration commented he is bullish on natural gas production pros-
pects within Northeastern Pennsylvania. Jones is aware that Alpine currently has very little exposure to this region. She also knows another company in her universe, Pure Energy, Inc., is based in Northeastern Pennsylvania and controls significant assets in the area. Pure Energy is highly leveraged, and Jones believes they will need to raise additional capital or partner with another firm to move to the production phase with their assets. Jones attempts to contact Alpine’s CEO with an unrelated question and is told he is unavailable because he is on a business trip to Northeastern Pennsylvania. Jones updates her research on Pure Energy and then recommends the stock to Lisa Wong, CFA, a portfolio manager who purchases significant positions in client accounts. The following week, Pure Energy announces that they have entered into an agreement to be purchased by Alpine for a significant premium. Has either Jones or Wong most likely
violated Standards with regards to the integrity of capital markets?
A
No.
B
Yes, Jones’ recommendation is based on insider information.
C
Yes, both Jones and Wong have acted on insider information.
2
Ian O’Sullivan, CFA, is the owner and sole employee of two companies, a public relations firm and a financial research firm. The public relations firm entered into a contract with Mallory Enterprises to provide public relations services, with O’Sullivan receiving 40,000 shares of Mallory stock in payment for his services. Over the next 10 days, the public relations firm issued several press releases that discussed Mallory’s excellent growth prospects. O’Sullivan, through his financial research firm, also published a research report recom-
mending Mallory stock as a “buy.” According to the CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct, O’Sullivan is most likely required to disclose his owner-
ship of Mallory stock in the: A
press releases only. B
research report only. C
both the press release and the research report. 3
Adira Badawi, CFA, who owns a research and consulting company, is an independent board member of a leading cement manufacturer in a small local market. Because of Badawi’s expertise in the cement industry, a foreign cement manufacturer looking to enter the local market has hired him to undertake a feasibility study. Under what circumstances can Badawi most likely
under-
take the assignment without violating the CFA Institute Code of Ethics and Standards of Professional Conduct? If he:
A
makes full disclosure to both companies.
B
receives written permission from the local company.
C
signs confidentiality agreements with both companies.
4
In order to provide investors with a more comprehensive view of a firm’s per-
formance, the current GIPS standards includes new provisions related to:
A
various measures of risk.
B
all aspects of performance measurement.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
3
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
C
the unique characteristics of each asset class. 5
Darden Crux, CFA, a portfolio manager at SWIFT Asset Management Ltd. (SWIFT), calls a friend to join him for dinner. The friend, a financial analyst at Cyber Kinetics (CK) declines the invitation and explains she is performing due diligence on Orca Electronics, a company CK is about to acquire. After the phone call, Crux searches the Internet for any news of the acquisition but finds nothing. Upon verifying that Orca is on SWIFT’s approved stock list, Crux purchases Orca’s common stock and call options for selective SWIFT clients. Two weeks later, CK announces its intention to acquire Orca. The next day, Crux sells all of the Orca securities, giving the fund a profit of $3 million. What action should Crux most likely take to avoid violating any CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct? A
Refuse to trade based on the information. B
Purchase the stock and call options for all clients. C
Trade only after analyzing the stock diligently and thoroughly. 6
Alexander Newton, CFA, is the chief compliance officer for Mills Investment Limited. Newton institutes a new policy requiring the pro rata distribution of new security issues to all established discretionary accounts for which the new issues are appropriate. The policy also provides for the exclusion of newly established discretionary accounts from the distribution until they have reached their one-month anniversary date. This policy is disclosed to all existing and potential clients. Did Newton most likely
violate any CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct? A
Yes.
B
No, because this allocation policy is not inequitable under the Standards.
C
No, because this policy has been adequately disclosed to all existing and potential clients.
7
Which of the following distinct entities can least likely
claim compliance with the Global Investment Performance Standards (GIPS)?
A
A multi-national financial services holding company
B
An investment management division of a regional commercial bank
C
A locally incorporated subsidiary undertaking investment management services
8
Prudence Charmaine, a CFA charterholder, was recently accused in writing of cheating on a professional accounting exam. She denied cheating and suc-
cessfully defended herself against the allegation. As part of her defense and as evidence of her character, Charmaine stated that she is a CFA charterholder and upholds the CFA Institute Code of Ethics and Standards of Professional Conduct. On her next annual Professional Conduct Statement, Charmaine does not report this allegation to CFA Institute. Did Charmaine most likely
violate the CFA Institute Code of Ethics or Standards of Professional Conduct?
A
No
B
Yes, she improperly used the CFA Institute Code and Standards to defend herself.
C
Yes, she did not report the allegation on her annual Professional Conduct Statement. 9
Which of the following is not
part of the nine major sections of the GIPS standards?
A
Performance Fees
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
4
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
B
Disclosure
C
Input Data
10
Which of the following statements related to requirements for the CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct Standard V(B)–Communication with Clients and Prospective Clients is least likely
accurate? The standard requires members and candidates to:
A
divulge the number of investment related personnel responsible for external communication.
B
disclose the basic format and general principles of the investment process. C
distinguish between fact and opinion in the presentation of investment anal-
ysis and recommendations.
11
Abdul Naib, CFA, was recently asked by his employer to submit an updated document providing the history of his employment and qualifications. The existing document on file was submitted when he was hired five years ago. His employer notices that the updated version shows that Naib obtained his Masters of Business Administration (MBA) two years ago, while the earlier version indicated he had already obtained his MBA. As the position Naib was hired for required a minimum qualification of an MBA, Naib is asked to explain the discrepancy. He justifies his actions by stating, “I knew you wouldn’t hire me if I didn’t have an MBA degree but I already had my CFA designation. Knowing you required an MBA, I went back to school on a part-time basis after I was hired to obtain it. I graduated at the top of my class, but this shouldn’t come as any surprise, as you have seen evidence I passed all of my CFA exams on the first attempt.” Did Naib most likely violate the CFA Institute Standards of Practice?
A
No.
B
Yes, with regard to Misconduct.
C
Yes, with regard to Reference to the CFA Designation.
12
Victoria Christchurch, CFA, is a management consultant currently working with a financial services firm interested in curtailing its high staff turnover, par-
ticularly amongst CFA charterholders. In recent months, the company lost 5 of its 10 most senior managers, all of whom have cited systemic unethical business practices as the reason for their leaving. To curtail staff turnover by encouraging ethical behavior, it would be least appropriate for Christchurch to recommend the company to do which of the following?
A
Implement a whistleblowing policy.
B
Encourage staff retention with increased benefits. C
Create, implement, and monitor a corporate code of ethics.
13
Millicent Plain has just finished taking Level II of the CFA examination. Upon leaving the examination site, she meets with four Level III candidates who also just sat for their exams. Curious about their examination experience, Plain asks the candidates how difficult the Level III exam was and how they did on it. The candidates say the essay portion of the examination was much harder than they had expected and they were not able to complete all questions as a result. The candidates go on to tell Plain about broad topic areas that were tested and com-
plain about specific formulas they had memorized that did not appear on the exam. The Level III candidates least likely
violated the CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct by discussing:
A
specific formulas.
B
broad topic areas.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
5
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
C
the examination essays. 14
Carlos Cruz, CFA, is one of two founders of an equity hedge fund. Cruz man-
ages the fund’s assets while the other co-founder, Brian Burkeman, CFA, is responsible for fund sales and marketing. Cruz notices the most recent sales material used by Burkeman indicates that assets under management are listed at a higher value than the current market value. Burkeman justifies the discrep-
ancy by stating recent market declines account for the difference. In order to comply with the CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct, Cruz should least likely
take which of the following actions?
A
Correct the asset information and provide updates to prospective clients.
B
Report the discrepancy to the CFA Institute Professional Conduct Program.
C
Provide a disclaimer within marketing material indicating prices are as of a specific date. 15
When a client asks her how she makes investment decisions, Petra Vogler, CFA, tells the client she uses mosaic theory. According to Vogler, the theory involves analyzing public and nonmaterial nonpublic information including the evalu-
ation of statements made to her by company insiders in one-on-one meetings where management discusses new earnings projections not known to the public. Vogler also gathers general industry information from industry experts she has contacted. Vogler most likely
violates the CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct because of her use of:
A
industry expert information. B
one-on-one meeting information.
C
nonmaterial nonpublic information.
16
Noor Hussein, CFA, runs a financial advisory business, specializing in retire-
ment planning and investments. One of her clients asks her to advise the firm’s pension fund trustees on available investments in the market including Islamic products. On the day prior to the meeting, Hussein spends an hour familiar-
izing herself with Islamic investment products and getting updates on local market conditions. The next day, she recommends Islamic investment products to the trustees based on her research and her expertise in retirement planning and investments. The trustees subsequently incorporate Islamic products into their investment allocation. Did Hussein’s basis for the recommendation most likely comply with the CFA Code of Ethics?
A
Yes.
B
No, with regard to Misconduct.
C
No, with regard to Diligence and Reasonable Basis. 17
Dimitri Kuznetsov, CFA, is a portfolio manager and holds shares of Barnikoff Limited and Matric Ventures in all client portfolios. Both companies have upcoming annual general meetings scheduled for the same day. The manage-
ment of Barnikoff proposes to change its financial year-end from September to December, while Matric Ventures proposes to enter into a high-risk venture. The proxy voting policy clause in all client investment management agreements managed by Kuznetsov states, “When voting proxies provides a cost benefit to the client, the manager must vote a proxy.” With regard to the proxy votes for Matric and Barnikoff, Kuznetsov would least likely
violate CFA Institute Standard III(A)–Loyalty, Prudence, and Care if he votes:
A
with management.
B
only the Matric proxy.
C
only the Barnikoff proxy.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
6
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
18
Merchant Capital Partners, a regional investment bank, acts as a market maker for Vital Link Health Services and other small firms listed on an over-the- counter exchange. For those shares for whom Merchant acts as market maker, it trades for its own book as well as engaging in risk arbitrage trading. Merchant allows staff members to trade in shares once clients and the company have traded. Merchant recently obtained material nonpublic information regarding Vital’s planned reverse takeover of a publicly listed competitor. In order to be in compliance with the CFA Institute Code and Standards, which type of trading in Vital shares should Merchant least likely
suspend?
A
Personal B
Risk arbitrage C
Passive proprietary
19
Over the past four years, a portfolio experienced returns of –8%, 4%, 17%, and –12%. The geometric mean return of the portfolio over the four-year period is
closest
to:
A
0.25%.
B
–0.37%.
C
0.99%.
20
When an investigator wants to test whether a particular parameter is greater than a specific value, the null and alternative hypothesis are best
defined as:
A
H
0
: θ ≤ θ
0
versus H
a
: θ > θ
0
.
B
H
0
: θ ≥ θ
0
versus H
a
: θ < θ0.
C
H
0
: θ = θ
0
versus H
a
: θ ≠ θ
21
An analyst has established the following prior probabilities regarding a compa-
ny's next quarter's earnings per share (EPS) exceeding, equaling, or being below the consensus estimate.
Prior Probabilities
EPS exceed consensus
25%
EPS equal consensus
55%
EPS are less than consensus
20%
Several days before releasing its earnings statement, the company announces a cut in its dividend. Given this new information, the analyst revises his opinion regarding the likelihood that the company will have EPS below the consensus estimate. He estimates the likelihood the company will cut the dividend, given that EPS exceeds/meets/falls below consensus, as reported below.
Probabilities the Company Cuts Dividends, Conditional on EPS Exceeding/Equaling/Falling below Consensus
5%
10%
P
(Cut div
|
EPS exceed)
P
(Cut div
|
EPS equal)
P
(Cut div
|
EPS below)
85%
The analyst thus determines that the unconditional probability for a cut in the dividend, P
(Cut div), is equal to 23.75%. Using Bayes’ formula, the updated (posterior) probability that the company’s EPS are below the consensus is closest to:
A
85%.
B
72%.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
7
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
C
20%.
22
Consider the investment in the following table:
Start of Year 1
One share purchased at $100
End of Year 1
$5.00 dividend/share paid and one additional share purchased at $125
End of Year 2
$5.00 dividend/share paid and both shares sold for $140 per share
Assuming dividends are not reinvested, compared with the time-weighted return, the money-weighted return is:
A
lower.
B
the same.
C
higher.
23
An analyst collects data relating to five commonly used measures of financial leverage and interest coverage for a randomly chosen sample of 300 firms. The data come from those firms’ fiscal year 2013 annual reports. These data are best characterized as:
A
longitudinal.
B
cross sectional.
C
time series.
24
The following information applies to a sample:
●
The point estimate of the population mean is 12.5.
●
The t
-statistic (
t
α/2
) used in calculating the 90% confidence interval is 1.67.
●
The sample size is 64.
●
The sample standard deviation is 5.
The 90% confidence interval for the population mean is closest to:
A
11.98 to 13.02.
B
12.37 to 12.63.
C
11.46 to 13.54.
25
Consider a two-tailed test of the hypothesis that the population mean is zero. The sample has 50 observations. The population is normally distributed with a known variance.
t
-Test rejection level
Degrees of freedom
p = 0.10
p = 0.05
p = 0.025
49
1.299
1.677
2.010
50
1.299
1.676
2.009
z
-Test rejection level
α = 0.10
α = 0.05
α = 0.025
1.645
1.960
2.330
At a 0.05 significance level, the rejection points are most likely
at:
A
–2.009 and 2.009.
B
–2.010 and 2.010.
C
–1.960 and 1.960.
26
A risk manager would like to calculate the coefficient of variation of a portfolio. The following table reports the annual returns of the portfolio and of the risk- free rate over the most recent five years:
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
8
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
Year
Portfolio Return
Risk-Free Rate
1
4.0%
2.0%
2
–1.0%
1.5%
3
7.0%
1.0%
4
11.0%
1.0%
5
2.0%
0.5%
The coefficient of variation of the portfolio is closest
to:
A
1.00.
B
0.74.
C
0.90.
27
An economist states that the probability of having the gross domestic product (GDP) of a country higher than 3% is 0.20. What are the odds against a GDP higher than 3%?
A
5 to 1
B
6 to 1
C
4 to 1
28
The joint probability of returns for securities A and B are as follows:
Joint Probability Function of Security A and Security B Returns (Entries Are Joint Probabilities)
Return on Security B = 30%
Return on Security B = 20%
Return on Security A = 25%
0.60
0
Return on Security A = 20%
0
0.40
The covariance of the returns between Securities A and B is closest
to:
A
12.
B
14.
C
13.
29
An investor deposits £2,000 into an account that pays 6% per annum com-
pounded continuously. The value of the account at the end of four years is closest
to:
A
£2,854.
B
£2,525.
C
£2,542.
30
The chart below depicts the relative strength lines for a stock index versus both a bond index and gold. In the month of June, it would be most
appropriate for an analyst using intermarket analysis to move investments from:
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
9
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
Relative Strength
2.6
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.2
2.4
Jan
Dec
Nov
Oct
Sep
Aug
Jul
Jun
May
Apr
Mar
Feb
Stock Index vs. Bond Index
Stock Index vs. Gold
A
gold to stocks.
B
stocks to bonds.
C
bonds to gold.
31
A normally distributed random variable has a mean of 100 and a standard devi-
ation of 12. The probability of observing a value greater than 82 is the cumula-
tive distribution function (cdf) of the standard normal variable:
A
N
(1.5).
B
N
(–1.5).
C
1 – N
(1.5).
32
The following statistical table is presented to an analyst
X
= x
Probability Function P
(
x
) = P
(
X
= x
)
Cumulative Distribution Function F
(
x
) = P
(
X
≤ x
)
1
0.10
0.10
2
0.15
0.25
3
0.50
0.75
4
0.15
0.90
5
0.10
1.00
Which of the following is the best
conclusion that can be drawn from the statis-
tical table?
A
The probability that the value of X
will be equal to 4 is 0.90
B
The probability that the value of X
will be less than or equal to 5 but greater than 2 is 0.75.
C
The random variable X
is continuous.
33
To project the assets and liabilities of a pension plan using a number of different assumptions, the most appropriate method to employ is:
A
Monte Carlo simulation because it can evaluate the effect of changes in assumptions.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
10
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
B
Monte Carlo simulation because it can provide more insights into cause and effect relationships than analytical methods.
C
historical simulation because risk not represented in the time period observed can be integrated in the simulation.
34
If the quantity demanded of pears falls by 4% when the price of apples decreases by 3%, then apples and pears are best described as:
A
complements.
B
substitutes.
C
inferior goods.
35
According to the Solow neoclassical growth model, sustained long-term growth in potential GDP is best
explained by:
A
capital deepening investments.
B
technological change.
C
growth in labor supply.
36
A positive movement in a lagging indicator would least likely
be used to:
A
confirm that an expansion is currently underway.
B
identify a past condition of the economy.
C
identify an expected future economic upturn.
37
Which of the following is the least likely
outcome when a monopolist adopts first-degree price discrimination because of customers’ differing demand elasticities?
A
The output increases to the point at which price equals the marginal cost.
B
The monopolist shares the total surplus with consumers.
C
The price for a marginal unit decreases to less than the price for other units.
38
If the scale of a single producer is small relative to the demand for an undiffer-
entiated good, the market structure of the producer is best
described as being:
A
an oligopoly.
B
monopolistic competition.
C
perfect competition.
39
The following data apply to a country in its domestic currency units:
Consumer spending on goods and services
875,060
Government spending on goods and services
305,600
Business gross fixed investment
286,400
Government gross fixed investment
84,120
Change in inventories
–68,500
Capital consumption allowance
8,540
Transfer payments
9,300
Statistical discrepancy
–2,850
Exports
219,800
Imports
250,980
Using the expenditures approach, the country’s GDP is closest
to:
A
1,466,490.
B
1,451,500.
C
1,448,650.
40
Which of the following statements is most
accurate based on the FX quotations in the table?
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
11
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
Spot Rate
One-Year Forward Rate
USD/EUR
1.2952
1.3001
A
The forward rate is trading at a discount to the spot rate by 0.0049 points.
B
The euro is trading at a forward premium of 49 points.
C
The US dollar is trading at a forward premium of 49 points.
41
Assume that a central bank has decided to lower interest rates in the economy. To carry out this policy, the central bank will most likely
:
A
increase required reserve requirements.
B
buy securities.
C
sell securities.
42
According to the concept of money neutrality, over the long term, the money supply is least likely
to affect:
A
inflation expectations.
B
inflation.
C
the real rate of interest.
43
Which of the following events would most likely
have a positive impact on the GDP of Switzerland and the gross national product (GNP) of France?
A
An industrial components manufacturer in France produces industrial com-
ponents in France using Swiss workers.
B
A Swiss company purchases machine tools from a manufacturing firm located in France.
C
An accounting firm located in France provides accounting services to a manufacturer located in Switzerland.
44
A member of the labor force quit her job last week and will begin a new job next week. During this interim period, for the purposes of calculating unem-
ployment statistics, this person is most likely
classified as:
A
hidden unemployed.
B
frictionally unemployed.
C
voluntarily unemployed.
45
The primary goal of both monetary and fiscal policy focuses on balancing eco-
nomic growth and:
A
income distribution.
B
inflation.
C
employment.
46
An accounting document that records transactions in the order in which they occur is best
described as a:
A
trial balance.
B
general ledger.
C
general journal.
47
Which of the following statements best
describes the role of the International Organization of Securities Commissions (IOSCO)? The IOSCO
A
is the oversight body to which the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) reports.
B
is responsible for regulating financial markets of member nations.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
12
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
C
assists in attaining the goal of cross-border cooperation in combating viola-
tions of securities laws.
48
The following information is available on a company for the current year.
Net income
$1,000,000
Average number of common shares outstanding
100,000
Details of convertible securities outstanding:
Convertible preferred shares outstanding
2,000
Dividend/share
$10
Each preferred share is convertible into five shares of common stock
Convertible bonds, $100 face value per bond
$80,000
8% coupon
Each bond is convertible into 25 shares of common stock
Corporate tax rate
40%
The company’s diluted EPS is closest
to:
A
$7.72.
B
$7.57.
C
$7.69.
49
For which of the following inventory valuation methods is the gross profit mar-
gin least likely
to be the same under both a perpetual inventory system and a periodic inventory system?
A
LIFO
B
Specific identification
C
FIFO
50
Under International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS), which of the follow-
ing financial statement elements most accurately represents inflows of economic resources to a company?
A
Revenues
B
Assets
C
Owners’ equity
51
Under IFRS, which of the following balance sheet presentation formats is
most
acceptable? Classifying assets and liabilities:
A
into operating, investing, and financing categories.
B
in liquidity order.
C
as monetary vs. non-monetary.
52
Previously, a manufacturer of high-quality industrial electrical generators only sold its units to customers, but it has just introduced a leasing program. The generators have expected useful lives of about 25 years, and the company antic-
ipates that the leases will have a term of 20 years or more. The company reports under International Financial Reporting Standards. Which of the following statements about the first year of the new leasing program is most accurate?
A
Regardless of how the company classifies the lease, its total cash flow and operating cash flow will be the same.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
13
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
B
If the lease is classified as an operating lease, the company’s profits should be higher for a given leased asset than they would be under a finance lease.
C
If the lease is classified as a finance lease, it will decrease the company’s liquidity position compared with when the company was only selling its generators.
53
The most
appropriate treatment for intangible assets with indefinite useful lives is to:
A
expense.
B
capitalize with no amortization.
C
capitalize and amortize.
54
The following data are available on a company:
Metric
Working capital
$60 million
Non-current assets
$235 million
Equity
$170 million
Current ratio
1.75
The company’s financial leverage is closest
to:
A
1.7.
B
2.2.
C
1.2.
55
Selected information from a company’s comparative income statement and balance sheet is presented below:
Selected Income Statement Data for the Year Ended 31 August ($ thousands)
2013
2012
Sales revenue
100,000
95,000
Cost of goods sold
47,000
47,500
Depreciation expense
4,000
3,500
Net Income
11,122
4,556
Selected Balance Sheet Data as of 31 August ($ thousands)
2013
2012
Current Assets
Cash and investments
21,122
25,000
Accounts receivable
25,000
13,500
Inventories
13,000
8,500
Total current assets
59,122
47,000
Current liabilities
Accounts payable
15,000
15,000
(continued)
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
14
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
2013
2012
Other current liabilities
7,000
9,000
Total current liabilities
22,000
24,000
The cash collected from customers in 2013 is closest
to:
A
$111,500.
B
$96,100.
C
$88,500.
56
The following information is available about a company for its current fiscal year:
Accounting profit (earnings before taxes)
$250,000
Taxable income
$215,000
Tax rate
30%
Income taxes paid in year
$61,200
Deferred tax liability, start of year
$82,400
Deferred tax liability, end of year
$90,650
The income tax expense reported on the current year’s statement of earnings is closest
to:
A
$72,750.
B
$69,450.
C
$64,500.
57
On 1 January 2014, the market rate of interest on a company’s bonds is 5%, and it issues a bond with the following characteristics:
Face value
€50 million
Coupon rate, paid annually
4%
Time to maturity
10 years (31 December 2023)
Issue price (per €100)
€92.28
If the company uses International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS), its interest expense (in millions) in 2014 is closest
to:
A
€2.307.
B
€2.386.
C
€1.846.
58
A company that prepares its financial statements according to US GAAP leased a piece of equipment on 1 January 2013. Information relevant to the transaction is as follows:
●
●
Five annual lease payments of $25,000, with the first payment due 1
January 2013
●
●
Interest rate on similar company debt is currently 8%
●
●
The fair value of the equipment is $115,000
●
●
Useful life of the equipment is seven years
(Continued)
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
15
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
●
●
The company depreciates other equipment in the same asset class on a
straight-line basis
The total expense related to the lease on the company’s 2013 income statement will be closest
to:
A
$25,000.
B
$28,185.
C
$22,024.
59
An equity analyst is forecasting next year’s net profit margin of a heavy equip-
ment manufacturing firm by using the average net profit margin over the past three years. In making his profit projection, he identifies the following three items:
1
The company reported losses from discontinued operations in each of the past three years.
2
The most recent year’s tax rate was only half of the prior two years’ rate as a result of a fiscal stimulus.
3
The company reported gains on the sale of investments in each of the past three years.
Which of the following statements about the preparation of the forecast is most
accurate? The analyst would:
A
use the most recent tax rate because it is the best predictor of future tax rates.
B
exclude the gains on the sale from investments because the company is a manufacturing firm.
C
include the losses from discontinued operations because they appear to be an ongoing feature for this company.
60
A company has consistently and significantly increased its cash balance over the past three years. The least likely
explanation for the increase in cash is a:
A
forthcoming issue of new equity.
B
potential acquisition.
C
planned increase in the dividend.
61
The financial statement that would be most
useful to an analyst in understand-
ing the changes that have occurred in a company’s retained earnings over a year is the statement of:
A
comprehensive income.
B
financial position.
C
changes in equity.
62
Under US GAAP, interest paid is most likely
included in which of the following cash flow activities?
A
Operating only
B
Financing only
C
Either operating or financing
63
A firm reported the following financial statement items:
€ millions
Net income
2,100
Non-cash charges
400
Interest expense
300
(continued)
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
16
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
€ millions
Capital expenditures
210
Working capital expenditures
0
Net borrowing
1,600
Tax rate
40%
The free cash flow to the firm (FCFF) is closest
to:
A
€2,110.
B
€2,470.
C
€2,590.
64
The following information is from a company’s accounting records:
€ millions
Revenues for the year
12,500
Total expenses for the year
10,000
Gains from available-for-sale securities
1,475
Loss on foreign currency translation adjustments on a foreign subsidiary
325
Dividends paid
500
The company’s total comprehensive income (in € millions) is closest to:
A
1,150.
B
3,150.
C
3,650.
65
Under US GAAP, which of the following is least likely
a disclosure concerning inventory?
A
The amount of inventories recognized as an expense during the period
B
The carrying amounts of inventories carried at fair value less costs to sell
C
The amount of the reversal of any write-down of inventories
66
Which of the following accounting actions would increase stockholders’ equity in the current period?
A
Using LIFO rather than FIFO accounting for inventory in an inflationary environment.
B
Capitalizing, rather than expensing, a payment.
C
Increasing the allowance for uncollectible accounts receivable.
67
Conservative, rather than aggressive, accounting is most likely associated with:
A
increased sustainability of earnings.
B
higher current reported performance.
C
recognition of losses once certain.
68
Using the data below, an analyst is in the process of comparing two companies (A and B) that are in the same industry.
Company A (in $ millions, except per share data)
Net income
$7,098
Weighted average common shares outstanding
4,366
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
17
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
Common share dividends
$1,700
Stock price per share at year-end
$41.00
Company B
Basic EPS
$4.35
Earnings multiple
21.17×
Dividend payout ratio
25.9%
Compared with Company B, Company A most likely
has a higher:
A
price-to-earnings ratio.
B
dividend payout ratio.
C
earnings per share.
69
The following information is available for a company:
2016 (in € millions)
EBIT (earnings before interest and taxes)
1,015.0
Interest expense
73.4
Tax expense
201.4
Total assets
5,305.0
Average total assets
5,421.0
Total debt
1,048.0
2015
Interest coverage
15.3×
Debt to total assets
18.2%
Operating return on assets (ROA)
17.3%
Compared with 2015, which of the following ratios most likely
indicates an improvement in the creditworthiness of the company? The change in the company’s:
A
operating ROA.
B
debt-to-total assets.
C
interest coverage.
70
A 20-year $1,000 fixed-rate non-callable bond with 8% annual coupons cur-
rently sells for $1,105.94. Assuming a 30% marginal tax rate and an additional risk premium for equity relative to debt of 5%, the cost of equity using the bond-yield-plus-risk-premium approach is closest
to:
A
9.9%
B
12.0%
C
13.0%
(Continued)
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
18
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
71
A company’s data are provided in the following table:
Cost of debt
10%
Cost of equity
16%
Debt-to-equity ratio (D/E)
50%
Tax rate
30%
The weighted average cost of capital (WACC) is closest
to:
A
14.0%.
B
11.5%.
C
13.0%.
72
A company is considering a switch from an all-equity capital structure to a structure with equal amounts of equity and debt without increasing assets. This change will reduce the net income by 30%. If the current return on equity (ROE) is 10%, the ROE under the proposed capital structure will be closest
to:
A
6%.
B
20%.
C
14%.
73
The following information is available for a firm in a developing country:
Risk-free rate
2.0%
Firm’s equity beta
1.5
Equity risk premium in a developed country
3.0%
Developing country risk premium
4.0%
Sovereign yield spread
2.5%
The firm’s cost of equity using the CAPM approach is closest
to:
A
10.5%.
B
12.5%.
C
10.3%.
74
A company extends its trade credit terms by four days to all its credit custom-
ers. These credit customers are most likely to experience a four-day:
A
decrease in their net operating cycle.
B
increase in their operating cycle.
C
decrease in their operating cycle.
75
Which of the following statements describes the most
appropriate treatment of cash flows in capital budgeting?
A
Interest costs are included in the project’s cash flows to reflect financing costs.
B
A project is evaluated using its incremental cash flows on an after-tax basis.
C
Sunk costs and externalities should not be included in the cash flow estimates.
76
Based on a need to borrow $2 million for one month, which of the following alternatives has the least expensive effective annual cost?
A
A credit line at 6.0% annually with a $4,000 annual commitment fee
B
A banker’s acceptance with an all-inclusive annual rate of 6.1%
C
Commercial paper at 5.9% annually with a dealer’s annual commission of $3,000 and a backup line annual cost of $4,000
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
19
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
77
Which of the following best
allows a board of directors to act in the interest of the company and shareholders?
A
Independent board members are selected from outside the industry.
B
Internal directors provide monitoring of the firm’s management.
C
The board has the authority to select and terminate senior management.
78
A project has the following cash flows ($) where the cash inflows are earned evenly throughout the year:
Year 0
Year 1
Year 2
Year 3
Year 4
–1,525
215
345
475
1,215
Assuming a discount rate of 11% annually, the discounted payback period (in years) is closest to:
A
3.4.
B
3.9.
C
4.0.
79
The execution step of the portfolio management process includes:
A
preparing the investment policy statement.
B
finalizing the asset allocation.
C
monitoring the portfolio performance.
80
An investor with $10,000 decides to borrow an additional $5,000 at the risk- free rate and invest all the available funds in the market portfolio. This investor’s portfolio beta is closest
to:
A
0.5.
B
1.0.
C
1.5.
81
The variance of returns of a security and the market portfolio are 0.25 and 0.09, respectively. If the covariance of security returns and market returns is 0.06, the security’s beta is closest
to:
A
0.24.
B
0.67.
C
0.40.
82
Risk management is most likely the process by which an organization:
A
minimizes its exposure to potential losses.
B
adjusts its risk to a predetermined level.
C
maximizes its risk-adjusted return.
83
A good risk governance process would most likely
:
A
provide guidance on the size of the largest acceptable loss for the organization.
B
provide different risk targets for each unit within the organization.
C
be a bottom-up process that reflects the current risk exposures of all parts of the organization.
84
Which of the following is most likely
associated with an investor’s ability to take risk rather than the investor’s willingness to take risk?
A
The investor has a long investment time horizon.
B
The investor believes earning excess returns on stocks is a matter of luck.
C
Safety of principal is very important to the investor.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
20
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
85
Which of the following portfolios of risky assets is most likely
the global minimum-variance portfolio?
Portfolio
Expected Return
Standard Deviation
A
5%
20%
B
8%
33%
C
3%
20%
A
Portfolio C
B
Portfolio A
C
Portfolio B
86
An analyst observes that stock markets usually demonstrate return distributions concentrated to the right with a higher frequency of negative deviation from the mean. This feature is most likely
known as:
A
positive skewness.
B
negative skewness.
C
kurtosis.
87
Returns from a depository receipt are least likely
affected by which of the fol-
lowing factors?
A
Exchange rate movements
B
Number of depository receipts
C
Analysts’ recommendations
88
Which of the following is most likely
one of the main functions of the financial system?
A
Determining an equilibrium interest rate
B
Ensuring that markets are informationally efficient
C
Ensuring that all investment projects receive sufficient funding
89
A portfolio manager analyzes a market and discovers that it is not possible to achieve consistent and superior risk-adjusted returns, net of all expenses. This market is most likely
characterized by:
A
persistent anomalies.
B
informational efficiency.
C
restrictions on short selling.
90
The financial systems that are operationally efficient are most likely
character-
ized by:
A
security prices that reflect fundamental values.
B
liquid markets with low commissions and order price impacts.
C
the use of resources where they are most valuable.
91
According to the industry life-cycle model, an industry in the shakeout stage is best
characterized as experiencing:
A
little or no growth and industry consolidation.
B
slowing growth and intense competition.
C
relatively high barriers to entry and periodic price wars.
92
In the semi-strong-form of market efficiency, fundamental analysis most likely
requires the analyst to:
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
21
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
A
extrapolate historical data to estimate future values and make investment decisions.
B
use trading rules for detecting the price movements that lead to new equi-
librium prices.
C
do a superior job of estimating the relevant variables and predicting earn-
ings surprises.
93
A price-weighted index series is composed of the following three stocks:
Price before Split
Price after Split
Stock
End of Day 1
End of Day 2
X
$10
$12
Y
$20
$19
Z
$60
$22
If stock Z completes a three-for-one split at the end of Day 1, the value of the index after the split (at the end of Day 2) is closest
to:
A
31.7.
B
32.3.
C
29.9.
94
A firm reports negative earnings for the year just ended. The price multiple of the firm’s stock that is least likely
to be meaningful is:
A
trailing price to earnings.
B
price to cash flow.
C
leading price to earnings.
95
Which of the following types of companies is most
sensitive to economic conditions?
A
Cyclical
B
Growth
C
Defensive
96
Which of the following is the most
appropriate reason for using a free cash flow to equity (FCFE) model to value equity of a company?
A
FCFE models provide more accurate valuations than the dividend discount model.
B
A firm’s borrowing activities could influence dividend decisions, but they would not affect FCFE.
C
FCFE is a measure of the firm’s dividend paying capacity.
97
An index provider launches a new index that will include value stocks in a spe-
cific country. This index will most likely
be a:
A
large-capitalization index.
B
style index.
C
fundamentally weighted index.
98
Given the following information for a company:
●
●
Market value per share $250
●
●
Current dividend per share $5
●
●
Dividend growth rate 4%
●
●
Required rate of return 6%
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
22
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
and using the Gordon growth model to estimate the intrinsic value, a share of the company is best
described as being:
A
fairly valued.
B
overvalued.
C
undervalued.
99
What type of risk most likely
affects an investor’s ability to buy and sell bonds in the desired amounts and at the desired time?
A
Market liquidity
B
Spread
C
Default
100
Which of the following most likely
exhibits negative convexity?
A
A callable bond
B
An option-free bond
C
A putable bond
101
If a bank wants the ability to retire debt prior to maturity in order to take advantage of lower borrowing rates, it most likely
issues a:
A
convertible bond.
B
callable bond.
C
putable bond.
102
An investor purchases a 5% coupon bond maturing in 15 years for par value. Immediately after purchase, the yield required by the market increases. The investor would then most likely
have to sell the bond at:
A
a premium.
B
a discount.
C
par.
103
The process of securitization is least likely
to allow banks to:
A
originate loans.
B
reduce the layers between borrowers and ultimate investors.
C
repackage loans into simpler structures.
104
Which of the following is least likely
a component of yield spread?
A
Taxation
B
Expected inflation rate
C
Credit risk
105
A 90-day commercial paper issue is quoted at a discount rate of 4.75% for a 360-day year. The bond equivalent yield for this instrument is closest
to:
A
4.87%.
B
4.81%.
C
4.75%.
106
The factor least likely
to influence the yield spread on an option-free, fixed-rate bond is a change in the:
A
credit risk of the issuer.
B
expected inflation rate.
C
liquidity of the bond.
107
Samsung Electronics Co has issued a five-year bond with a par value of $1,000 and a coupon rate of 6.5%. This bond is most likely
to be classified as a:
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
23
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
A
capital market security.
B
surety bond.
C
consol.
108
In a mortgage pass-through security, the pass-through rate:
A
is adjusted as market rates rise or fall.
B
adjusts the rate on the underlying pool of mortgages by a servicing fee.
C
is equal to the mortgage rate on the underlying pool of mortgages.
109
Which of the following is most likely
an example of a Eurobond?
A
A Canadian borrower issuing British pound–denominated bonds in the UK market.
B
A Japanese borrower issuing US dollar–denominated bonds in the US market.
C
An Australian borrower issuing Canadian dollar–denominated bonds in the UK market.
110
A bond is currently selling for 102.31. A valuation model estimates the price will fall to 101.12 if interest rates increase by 20 bps and rise to 103.74 if interest rates decrease by 20 bps. Using these estimates, the effective duration of the bond is closest to:
A
6.48.
B
6.40.
C
6.31.
111
Which of the following derivatives is least likely
to be classified as a contingent claim?
A
A futures contract
B
A call option contract
C
A credit default swap
112
Forward rate agreements are most likely
used to hedge an exposure in the:
A
foreign exchange market.
B
money market.
C
equity market.
113
An investor notices that the price of an American call option is above the price of a European call option with otherwise identical features. What is the most likely
reason for this difference?
A
The options are close to expiration.
B
The options are deep in the money.
C
The underlying will go ex-dividend.
114
If the exercise price of a European put option at expiration is below the price of the underlying, the value of the option is
most likely
:
A
equal to zero.
B
less than zero.
C
greater than zero.
115
In efficient financial markets, risk-free arbitrage opportunities:
A
will not exist.
B
may persist in the long run.
C
may exist temporarily.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
24
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
116
Do management fees most likely
get paid to the manager of a hedge fund, regardless of the fund’s performance?
A
No, only when the fund’s net asset value exceeds the previous high-water mark
B
No, only when the fund’s gross return is positive
C
Yes
117
Investors in alternative assets who seek liquidity are most likely
to invest in:
A
hedge funds.
B
real estate investment trusts.
C
private equity.
118
The real estate valuation method that uses a discounted cash flow model is best
characterized as:
A
a comparable sales approach.
B
a cost approach.
C
an income approach.
119
Which of the following is least likely
to reduce the likelihood of being defrauded by a dishonest money manager?
A
Third-party custody of assets under management
B
Strong and consistent reported investment performance
C
Independent verification of investment results
120
In valuing underlying hedge fund positions, the most conservative approach is most likely one that uses:
A
the average of the bid and ask prices.
B
bid prices for longs and ask prices for shorts.
C
the most recent market prices.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
T
he afternoon session of the 2018 Level I Chartered Financial Analyst
® Mock
Examination has 120 questions. To best simulate the exam day experience, candidates are advised to allocate an average of one and a half minutes per question for a total of 180 minutes (3 hours) for this session of the exam.
Questions
Topic
Minutes
1–18
Ethical and Professional Standards
27
19–33
Quant
22.5
34–45
Econ
18
46–69
Financial Reporting and Analysis
36
70–78
Corporate Finance
13.5
79–86
Portfolio Management
12
87–98
Equity
18
99–110
Fixed Income
18
111–115
Derivatives
7.5
116–120
Alternative Investments
7.5
Total:
180
By accessing this mock exam, you agree to the following terms of use: This mock exam is provided to currently registered CFA candidates. Candidates may view and print the exam for personal exam prepara-
tion only. The following activities are strictly prohibited and may result in disciplinary and/or legal action: accessing or permitting access by anyone other than currently-registered CFA candidates; copying, posting to any website, emailing, distributing and/or reprinting the mock exam for any purpose
© 2017 CFA Institute . All rights reserved.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
2
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
2018 LEVEL I MOCK EXAM (B) PM
1
Claire Jones, CFA, is an analyst following natural gas companies in the United States. At an industry energy conference, the CFO of Alpine Energy states they are interested in making strategic acquisitions. At a separate event, Alpine’s head of exploration commented he is bullish on natural gas production pros-
pects within Northeastern Pennsylvania. Jones is aware that Alpine currently has very little exposure to this region. She also knows another company in her universe, Pure Energy, Inc., is based in Northeastern Pennsylvania and controls significant assets in the area. Pure Energy is highly leveraged, and Jones believes they will need to raise additional capital or partner with another firm to move to the production phase with their assets. Jones attempts to contact Alpine’s CEO with an unrelated question and is told he is unavailable because he is on a business trip to Northeastern Pennsylvania. Jones updates her research on Pure Energy and then recommends the stock to Lisa Wong, CFA, a portfolio manager who purchases significant positions in client accounts. The following week, Pure Energy announces that they have entered into an agreement to be purchased by Alpine for a significant premium. Has either Jones or Wong most likely
violated Standards with regards to the integrity of capital markets?
A
No.
B
Yes, Jones’ recommendation is based on insider information.
C
Yes, both Jones and Wong have acted on insider information.
A is correct because Jones has used the mosaic theory to combine non-material, non-
public information with material public information.
B is incorrect because if taken in isolation, the information Jones received on the location of a business trip would be considered non-material.
C is incorrect because if taken in isolation, the information Jones received on the location of a business trip would be considered non-material.
Guidance for Standards I–VII
LOS a, b
Standard II(A)–Material Nonpublic Information
2
Ian O’Sullivan, CFA, is the owner and sole employee of two companies, a public relations firm and a financial research firm. The public relations firm entered into a contract with Mallory Enterprises to provide public relations services, with O’Sullivan receiving 40,000 shares of Mallory stock in payment for his services. Over the next 10 days, the public relations firm issued several press releases that discussed Mallory’s excellent growth prospects. O’Sullivan, through his financial research firm, also published a research report recom-
mending Mallory stock as a “buy.” According to the CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct, O’Sullivan is most likely required to disclose his owner-
ship of Mallory stock in the: A
press releases only. B
research report only. C
both the press release and the research report.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
3
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
C is correct because members should disclose all matters that reasonably could be expected to impair the member’s objectivity [Standard I(B), Standard VI(A)]. A is incorrect because both the press release and the research report should disclose any potential conflict of interest.
B is incorrect because both the press release and the research report should disclose any potential conflict of interest.
Guidance for Standards I–VII LOS a Standard I(B)–Independence and Objectivity, Standard VI(A)–Disclosure of Conflicts
3
Adira Badawi, CFA, who owns a research and consulting company, is an independent board member of a leading cement manufacturer in a small local market. Because of Badawi’s expertise in the cement industry, a foreign cement manufacturer looking to enter the local market has hired him to undertake a feasibility study. Under what circumstances can Badawi most likely
under-
take the assignment without violating the CFA Institute Code of Ethics and Standards of Professional Conduct? If he:
A
makes full disclosure to both companies.
B
receives written permission from the local company.
C
signs confidentiality agreements with both companies.
A is correct because making full and fair disclosure of all matters that could reasonably be expected to impair one’s
independence and objectivity or interfere with respective duties to one’s clients is required by Standard VI(A)–Disclosure of Conflicts of the CFA Institute Code of Ethics and Standards of Professional Conduct.
B is incorrect because written permission from both parties would be needed to provide full and fair disclosure of all matters that could reasonably be expected to impair their independence and objectivity or interfere with respective duties to their clients. The requirement to disclose under Standard VI does not mandate that this be in writing. In fact, members and candidates have the responsibility of determining how often, in what manner, and in what particular circumstances the disclosure must be made [Standard IV(B)–Additional Compensation Arrangements requires written consent]. C is incorrect because the signing of confidentiality agreements does not necessar-
ily provide full and fair disclosure of all matters that could reasonably be expected to impair Badawi’s independence and objectivity or interfere with respective duties to his clients as required by Standard VI. Confidentiality agreements could actually restrict the disclosure of information that would provide fair disclosure.
Guidance for Standards I–VII LOS c Standard VI(A)–Disclosure of Conflicts 4
In order to provide investors with a more comprehensive view of a firm’s per-
formance, the current GIPS standards includes new provisions related to:
A
various measures of risk.
B
all aspects of performance measurement.
C
the unique characteristics of each asset class.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
4
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
A is correct. Historically, the GIPS standards focused primarily on returns. In the spirit of fair representation and full disclosure, and in order to provide investors with a more comprehensive view of a firm’s performance, the current GIPS standards includes new provisions related to risk.
B is incorrect, the GIPS standards do not address all aspects of performance measurement.
C is incorrect, the GIPS standards do no cover the unique characteristics of each asset class. The GIPS Standards
LOS a
5
Darden Crux, CFA, a portfolio manager at SWIFT Asset Management Ltd. (SWIFT), calls a friend to join him for dinner. The friend, a financial analyst at Cyber Kinetics (CK) declines the invitation and explains she is performing due diligence on Orca Electronics, a company CK is about to acquire. After the phone call, Crux searches the Internet for any news of the acquisition but finds nothing. Upon verifying that Orca is on SWIFT’s approved stock list, Crux purchases Orca’s common stock and call options for selective SWIFT clients. Two weeks later, CK announces its intention to acquire Orca. The next day, Crux sells all of the Orca securities, giving the fund a profit of $3 million. What action should Crux most likely take to avoid violating any CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct? A
Refuse to trade based on the information. B
Purchase the stock and call options for all clients. C
Trade only after analyzing the stock diligently and thoroughly. A is correct as members/candidates who possess material nonpublic information that could affect the value of an investment should not act or cause others to act on the information. Crux traded on the material information that Orca is about to be acquired by Cyber Kinetics. The information is nonpublic because it is not publicly available, which was verified when Crux researched Orca on the Internet and found nothing about the acquisition [Standard II(A)]. B is incorrect because the information is material and nonpublic and should not be traded.
C is incorrect because the information is material and nonpublic and should not be traded.
Guidance for Standards I–VII LOS b Standard II(A)–Material Nonpublic Information 6
Alexander Newton, CFA, is the chief compliance officer for Mills Investment Limited. Newton institutes a new policy requiring the pro rata distribution of new security issues to all established discretionary accounts for which the new issues are appropriate. The policy also provides for the exclusion of newly established discretionary accounts from the distribution until they have reached
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
5
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
their one-month anniversary date. This policy is disclosed to all existing and potential clients. Did Newton most likely
violate any CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct? A
Yes.
B
No, because this allocation policy is not inequitable under the Standards.
C
No, because this policy has been adequately disclosed to all existing and potential clients.
A is correct because under Standard III(B)–Fair Dealing, members and candidates should disclose to clients and prospective clients how they select accounts to participate in an order and how they determine the amount of securities each account will buy or sell. Trade allocation procedures must be fair and equitable, and disclosure of inequitable allocation methods does not relieve the member or candidate of this obligation. All discretionary accounts should be treated in the same manner. Treating newer accounts differently would be considered inequitable regardless if this policy is disclosed.
B is incorrect because making new accounts wait for an arbitrary anniversary date before participating is not fair or equitable.
C is incorrect because under Standard III(B) inequitable allocation methods cannot be disclosed away.
Guidance for Standards I–VII LOS a Standard III(B)–Fair Dealing
7
Which of the following distinct entities can least likely
claim compliance with the Global Investment Performance Standards (GIPS)?
A
A multi-national financial services holding company
B
An investment management division of a regional commercial bank
C
A locally incorporated subsidiary undertaking investment management services
A is correct because the Global Investment Performance Standards require that firms be defined as an investment firm, subsidiary, or division held out to clients or prospective clients as a distinct business entity (0.A.12). A multi-national financial services holding company is unlikely to be solely operating as an investment firm, and the scope of the business could also make it more difficult to claim compliance on a firm-wide basis.
B is incorrect because an investment management division or a regional commercial bank could fit the definition of a firm as defined in 0.A.12.
C is incorrect because an investment management division of a regional commercial bank could fit the definition of a firm as defined in 0.A.12.
Global Investment Performance Standards (GIPS) LOS b
GIPS Requirement 0.A.12
8
Prudence Charmaine, a CFA charterholder, was recently accused in writing of cheating on a professional accounting exam. She denied cheating and suc-
cessfully defended herself against the allegation. As part of her defense and as
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
6
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
evidence of her character, Charmaine stated that she is a CFA charterholder and upholds the CFA Institute Code of Ethics and Standards of Professional Conduct. On her next annual Professional Conduct Statement, Charmaine does not report this allegation to CFA Institute. Did Charmaine most likely
violate the CFA Institute Code of Ethics or Standards of Professional Conduct?
A
No
B
Yes, she improperly used the CFA Institute Code and Standards to defend herself.
C
Yes, she did not report the allegation on her annual Professional Conduct Statement. C is correct because Charmaine should have reported the cheating allegation when mak-
ing her annual Professional Conduct Statement. Even though she successfully defended herself against the charges and the charges were dropped, she has a responsibility to report the written complaint involving her integrity. The Code of Ethics requires CFA charterholders to practice and encourage others to practice in a professional and ethical manner that will reflect credit on themselves and the profession.
A is incorrect because Charmaine should have reported the cheating charges and the subsequent successful defense when making her annual Professional Conduct Statement. Even though she successfully defended herself against the charges, she has a responsi-
bility to report the written complaint involving her integrity. The Code of Ethics requires CFA charterholders to practice and encourage others to practice in a professional and ethical manner that will reflect credit on themselves and the profession. B is incorrect because it is not apparent that Charmaine violated Standard VII(B)–
Reference to CFA Institute, the CFA Designation, and the CFA Program. Charmaine was correct in stating she is required to abide by the CFA Code and Standards. CFA institute Code of Ethics and Standards of Professional Conduct
LOS c
9
Which of the following is not
part of the nine major sections of the GIPS standards?
A
Performance Fees
B
Disclosure
C
Input Data
A is correct. The nine major sections of the GIPS standards do not include performance fees. The nine major sections are fundamentals of compliance, input data, calculation methodology, composite construction, disclosure, presentation and reporting, real estate, private equity, and wrap fee/separately managed account portfolios. B is incorrect because input data is one of the nine major sections of the GIPS standards.
C is incorrect because disclosure is one of the nine major sections of the GIPS standards.
The GIPS Standards LOS d
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
7
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
10
Which of the following statements related to requirements for the CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct Standard V(B)–Communication with Clients and Prospective Clients is least likely
accurate? The standard requires members and candidates to:
A
divulge the number of investment related personnel responsible for external communication.
B
disclose the basic format and general principles of the investment process. C
distinguish between fact and opinion in the presentation of investment anal-
ysis and recommendations.
A is correct. The CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct Standard V(B)–
Communication with Clients and Prospective Clients does not limit the type or number of staff responsible for external communication.
B is incorrect because disclosure of the basic format and general principles of the investment process is a requirement.
C is incorrect because distinguishing between fact and opinion in the presentation of investment analysis and recommendations is a requirement.
Code of Ethics and Standards of Professional Practice
LOS b
11
Abdul Naib, CFA, was recently asked by his employer to submit an updated document providing the history of his employment and qualifications. The existing document on file was submitted when he was hired five years ago. His employer notices that the updated version shows that Naib obtained his Masters of Business Administration (MBA) two years ago, while the earlier version indicated he had already obtained his MBA. As the position Naib was hired for required a minimum qualification of an MBA, Naib is asked to explain the discrepancy. He justifies his actions by stating, “I knew you wouldn’t hire me if I didn’t have an MBA degree but I already had my CFA designation. Knowing you required an MBA, I went back to school on a part-time basis after I was hired to obtain it. I graduated at the top of my class, but this shouldn’t come as any surprise, as you have seen evidence I passed all of my CFA exams on the first attempt.” Did Naib most likely violate the CFA Institute Standards of Practice?
A
No.
B
Yes, with regard to Misconduct.
C
Yes, with regard to Reference to the CFA Designation.
B is correct because Naib knowingly misrepresented his qualifications by stating he had obtained an MBA degree at the time of his hire when in fact he had not. This reflects adversely on his professional integrity, violating Standard I(D)–Misconduct. Stating that he passed his CFA exams in three consecutive years is not a violation of Standard VII(B)–
Reference to CFA Institute, the CFA Designation, and the CFA Program if it is factual. There is no evidence given to indicate he did not pass as claimed. A is incorrect because Naib knowingly misrepresented himself by stating he had obtained an MBA degree when in fact he had not. This reflects adversely on his profes-
sional integrity, violating Standard I(D)–Misconduct.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
8
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
C is incorrect because stating he passed his CFA exams consecutively is not a violation of Standard VII(B)–Reference to CFA Institute, the CFA Designation, and the CFA Program. There is no evidence given to indicate he did not pass as claimed.
Guidance for Standards I–VII
LOS b
12
Victoria Christchurch, CFA, is a management consultant currently working with a financial services firm interested in curtailing its high staff turnover, par-
ticularly amongst CFA charterholders. In recent months, the company lost 5 of its 10 most senior managers, all of whom have cited systemic unethical business practices as the reason for their leaving. To curtail staff turnover by encouraging ethical behavior, it would be least appropriate for Christchurch to recommend the company to do which of the following?
A
Implement a whistleblowing policy.
B
Encourage staff retention with increased benefits. C
Create, implement, and monitor a corporate code of ethics.
B is correct because the offering of increased benefits to encourage staff retention would not necessarily stop the unethical behavior causing staff turnover and would effectively be asking the ethical employees to ignore the unethical behavior, thus being complicit in the behavior. Under Standard I(A)–Knowledge of the Law, CFA charterholders and candidates must disassociate themselves from unethical behavior. As the unethical business practices are seen as systemic, it would likely require them to leave the firm. Implementing a whistleblowing policy and adopting a corporate code of ethics would likely help to build a foundation of strong ethical behavior. A is incorrect as introducing a whistleblowing policy would likely help to build a foundation of strong ethical behavior
C is incorrect as implementing a corporate code of ethics would likely help to build a foundation of strong ethical behavior. Guidance for Standards I–VII
LOS c
13
Millicent Plain has just finished taking Level II of the CFA examination. Upon leaving the examination site, she meets with four Level III candidates who also just sat for their exams. Curious about their examination experience, Plain asks the candidates how difficult the Level III exam was and how they did on it. The candidates say the essay portion of the examination was much harder than they had expected and they were not able to complete all questions as a result. The candidates go on to tell Plain about broad topic areas that were tested and com-
plain about specific formulas they had memorized that did not appear on the exam. The Level III candidates least likely
violated the CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct by discussing:
A
specific formulas.
B
broad topic areas. C
the examination essays.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
9
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
C is correct because discussing the level of difficulty of the essay portion of the exam-
ination did not violate Standard VII(A)–Conduct as Members and Candidates in the CFA Program. Standard VII(A) and the Candidate Pledge were violated by candidates revealing broad topical areas and formulas tested or not tested on the exam.
A is incorrect as Standard VII(A)–Conduct as Members and Candidates in the CFA Program and the Candidate Pledge was violated by candidates revealing specific formulas
B is incorrect as Standard VII(A)–Conduct as Members and Candidates in the CFA Program and the Candidate Pledge was violated by candidates revealing portions of the CBOK covered on the exam and areas not covered
Guidance for Standards I–VII
LOS b
Standard VII(A)–Conduct as Participants in CFA Institute Programs 14
Carlos Cruz, CFA, is one of two founders of an equity hedge fund. Cruz man-
ages the fund’s assets while the other co-founder, Brian Burkeman, CFA, is responsible for fund sales and marketing. Cruz notices the most recent sales material used by Burkeman indicates that assets under management are listed at a higher value than the current market value. Burkeman justifies the discrep-
ancy by stating recent market declines account for the difference. In order to comply with the CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct, Cruz should least likely
take which of the following actions?
A
Correct the asset information and provide updates to prospective clients.
B
Report the discrepancy to the CFA Institute Professional Conduct Program.
C
Provide a disclaimer within marketing material indicating prices are as of a specific date. B is correct because a violation of Standard I(A)–Knowledge of the Law is likely to occur unless the asset base information is corrected. Cruz has yet to violate any CFA Institute Standards so he need not report a violation. If Cruz does not take action he will be in violation of the Standards and at that point he would need to report this violation because Standard I(A) applies as the member should know his conduct may contribute to a violation of applicable laws, rules, regulations, or the Code and Standards related to the inaccurate sales materials. Cruz should seek to have the information corrected and accurate information provided to prospective clients. It may also be prudent to seek the advice of legal counsel. A is incorrect as Cruz should seek to have the information corrected and accurate information provided to prospective clients. C is incorrect as providing a disclaimer within the marketing material concerning the date of the market prices would be a prudent step since market prices are likely to change frequently from when the material was published. Guidance for Standards I–VII
LOS c
Standard I(A)–Knowledge of the Law
15
When a client asks her how she makes investment decisions, Petra Vogler, CFA, tells the client she uses mosaic theory. According to Vogler, the theory involves analyzing public and nonmaterial nonpublic information including the evalu-
ation of statements made to her by company insiders in one-on-one meetings
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
10
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
where management discusses new earnings projections not known to the public. Vogler also gathers general industry information from industry experts she has contacted. Vogler most likely
violates the CFA Institute Standards of Professional Conduct because of her use of:
A
industry expert information. B
one-on-one meeting information.
C
nonmaterial nonpublic information.
B is correct because a violation of Standard II(A)–Material Nonpublic Information is likely to occur when using information that is selectively disclosed by corporations to a small group of investors, analysts, or other market participants. Earnings estimates given in a one-on-one meeting would likely be considered material and nonpublic information. Information made available to analysts remains nonpublic until it is made available to investors in general. Under the mosaic theory it is acceptable to use information from industry contacts as long as the analyst uses appropriate methods to arrive at her con-
clusions. Additionally, it is acceptable to use nonmaterial nonpublic information in her analysis, and this use is not a violation of Standard II(A)–Material Nonpublic Information.
A is incorrect because under the mosaic theory it is acceptable to use information from industry contacts as long as the analyst uses appropriate methods to arrive at her conclusions. C is incorrect because it is acceptable to use nonmaterial nonpublic information in her analysis, and this use is not a violation of Standard II(A)–Material Nonpublic Information.
Guidance for Standards I–VII
LOS b
Standard II(A)–Material Nonpublic Information
16
Noor Hussein, CFA, runs a financial advisory business, specializing in retire-
ment planning and investments. One of her clients asks her to advise the firm’s pension fund trustees on available investments in the market including Islamic products. On the day prior to the meeting, Hussein spends an hour familiar-
izing herself with Islamic investment products and getting updates on local market conditions. The next day, she recommends Islamic investment products to the trustees based on her research and her expertise in retirement planning and investments. The trustees subsequently incorporate Islamic products into their investment allocation. Did Hussein’s basis for the recommendation most likely comply with the CFA Code of Ethics?
A
Yes.
B
No, with regard to Misconduct.
C
No, with regard to Diligence and Reasonable Basis. C is correct because Hussein did not likely act with competence and diligence as required by Standard V(A). One half day of preparation with regard to Islamic investment prod-
ucts would not likely be considered sufficient to give investment advice to pension plan trustees. Misconduct was not violated by Hussein stating she is an expert in retirement planning and investments because this is the area she specializes in.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
11
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
A is incorrect because Hussein did not likely act with competence and diligence as required by Standard V(A). One half day of preparation with regard to Islamic investment products would not likely be considered sufficient to give investment advice to pension plan trustees. B is incorrect because it is not likely she violated Standard I(D)–Misconduct, i.e., con-
duct involving dishonesty, fraud, and/or deceit by stating she is an expert in retirement planning and investments.
Guidance for Standards I–VII
LOS b
Standard V(A)–Diligence and Reasonable Basis
17
Dimitri Kuznetsov, CFA, is a portfolio manager and holds shares of Barnikoff Limited and Matric Ventures in all client portfolios. Both companies have upcoming annual general meetings scheduled for the same day. The manage-
ment of Barnikoff proposes to change its financial year-end from September to December, while Matric Ventures proposes to enter into a high-risk venture. The proxy voting policy clause in all client investment management agreements managed by Kuznetsov states, “When voting proxies provides a cost benefit to the client, the manager must vote a proxy.” With regard to the proxy votes for Matric and Barnikoff, Kuznetsov would least likely
violate CFA Institute Standard III(A)–Loyalty, Prudence, and Care if he votes:
A
with management.
B
only the Matric proxy.
C
only the Barnikoff proxy.
B is correct because Standard III(A)–Loyalty, Prudence, and Care states that it is a member or candidate’s duty to vote proxies on behalf of clients in an informed and responsible manner. However, if a cost–benefit analysis shows voting all proxies may not benefit the client, voting all proxies may not be necessary. The member or candidate is responsible for informing all clients if this is the policy of the fund manager. The member or candidate must take steps to disclose this proxy voting policy to clients. Voting the Barnikoff proxy does not appear to offer a benefit because the issue is not of a critical nature, but voting the proxy for Matric involves a material issue and is a benefit that should be voted on. A is incorrect because Standard III(A)–Loyalty, Prudence, and Care states that it is a member or candidate’s duty to vote proxies on behalf of clients in an informed and responsible manner. A manager must not blindly vote with management without first considering the impact of the issue at hand and its benefit to the client. C is incorrect because while Standard III(A)–Loyalty, Prudence, and Care states that it is a member or candidate’s duty to vote proxies on behalf of clients in an informed and responsible manner, if a cost–benefit analysis shows voting all proxies may not benefit the client, voting all proxies may not be necessary.
Guidance for Standards I–VII
LOS b
Standard III(A)–Loyalty, Prudence, and Care
18
Merchant Capital Partners, a regional investment bank, acts as a market maker for Vital Link Health Services and other small firms listed on an over-the- counter exchange. For those shares for whom Merchant acts as market maker, it trades for its own book as well as engaging in risk arbitrage trading. Merchant allows staff members to trade in shares once clients and the company have
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
12
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
traded. Merchant recently obtained material nonpublic information regarding Vital’s planned reverse takeover of a publicly listed competitor. In order to be in compliance with the CFA Institute Code and Standards, which type of trading in Vital shares should Merchant least likely
suspend?
A
Personal B
Risk arbitrage C
Passive proprietary
C is correct because according to Standard II(A)–Material Nonpublic Information, Recommended Procedures for Compliance, if Merchant stopped market making, a form of proprietary trading, due to being in possession of material nonpublic information, it could tip off investors that Vital is likely to be making a major announcement in the near future. This would be counterproductive to the goals of maintaining the confidentiality of information and providing market liquidity. The Standard recommends that market makers remain passive when in possession of material nonpublic information. The Standard also requires personal trading to be suspended when in possession of material nonpublic information, and it is prudent to suspend arbitrage trading to prevent profits from insider trading.
A is incorrect because when in possession of material nonpublic information, Standard II(A)–Material Nonpublic Information requires personal trading to be suspended.
B is incorrect because when in possession of material nonpublic information, accord-
ing to Standard II(A)–Material Nonpublic Information, it is prudent to suspend arbitrage trading to prevent profits from insider trading.
Guidance for Standards I–VII
LOS c
Standard II(A)–Material Nonpublic Information
19
Over the past four years, a portfolio experienced returns of –8%, 4%, 17%, and –12%. The geometric mean return of the portfolio over the four-year period is
closest
to:
A
0.25%.
B
–0.37%.
C
0.99%.
B is correct. Add one to each of the given returns, then multiply them together and take the fourth root of the resulting product. 0.92 × 1.04 × 1.17 × 0.88 = 0.985121; 0.985121 raised to the 0.25 power is 0.996259. Subtracting one and multiplying by 100 gives the correct geometric mean return: [(0.92 × 1.04 × 1.17 × 0.88)
0.25
– 1] × 100 = –0.37%.
A is incorrect because it is the arithmetic mean of the four numbers.
C is incorrect because it is the solution to: (0.92 × 1.04 × 1.17 × 0.88) = 0.99 (rounded).
Statistical Concepts and Market Returns
LOS e
Section 5.4.2
20
When an investigator wants to test whether a particular parameter is greater than a specific value, the null and alternative hypothesis are best
defined as:
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
13
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
A
H
0
: θ ≤ θ
0
versus H
a
: θ > θ
0
.
B
H
0
: θ ≥ θ
0
versus H
a
: θ < θ0.
C
H
0
: θ = θ
0
versus H
a
: θ ≠ θ
A is correct. A positive “hoped for” condition means that the null will be rejected (and the alternative accepted) only if the evidence indicates that the population parameter is greater than θ
0
. Thus, H
0
: θ ≤ θ
0
versus H
a
: θ > θ
0
is the correct statement of the null and alternative hypotheses, respectively.
B is incorrect; it can only discern that a parameter is possibly lesser than a value.
C is incorrect; it can only discern that a parameter is not equal to a value.
Hypothesis Testing
LOS a, b Section 2
21
An analyst has established the following prior probabilities regarding a compa-
ny's next quarter's earnings per share (EPS) exceeding, equaling, or being below the consensus estimate.
Prior Probabilities
EPS exceed consensus
25%
EPS equal consensus
55%
EPS are less than consensus
20%
Several days before releasing its earnings statement, the company announces a cut in its dividend. Given this new information, the analyst revises his opinion regarding the likelihood that the company will have EPS below the consensus estimate. He estimates the likelihood the company will cut the dividend, given that EPS exceeds/meets/falls below consensus, as reported below.
Probabilities the Company Cuts Dividends, Conditional on EPS Exceeding/Equaling/Falling below Consensus
P
(Cut div│EPS exceed)
5%
P
(Cut div│EPS equal)
10%
P
(Cut div│EPS below)
85%
The analyst thus determines that the unconditional probability for a cut in the dividend, P
(Cut div), is equal to 23.75%. Using Bayes’ formula, the updated (posterior) probability that the company’s EPS are below the consensus is closest to:
A
85%.
B
72%.
C
20%.
B is correct. Bayes’ Formula:
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
14
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
Updated probability of event given the new information
=
Probability of the new information given event
Uncondition
al probability of the new information
Prior probability o
×
f event
where
Updated probability of event given the new information: P
(EPS below│Cut div);
Probability of the new information given event: P
(Cut div│EPS below) = 85%;
Unconditional probably of the new information: P
(Cut div) = 23.75%;
Prior probability of event: P
(EPS below) = 20%.
Therefore, the probability of EPS falling below the consensus is updated as:
P
(EPS below│Cut div) = [
P
(Cut div│EPS below)/
P
(Cut div)] × P
(EPS below)
= (0.85/0.2375) × 0.20 = 0.71579 ~ 72%
B is incorrect. It is the given P
(Cut div│EPS below).
C is incorrect. It simply multiplies the unconditional probability for a cut in the divi-
dend with the conditional probability of a cut in the dividend given that EPS falls below consensus: P
(Cut div) × P
(Cut div│EPS below) = 0.2375 × 0.85 = 20.188.%
Probability Concepts
LOS h, n
Sections 2, 4.1
22
Consider the investment in the following table:
Start of Year 1
One share purchased at $100
End of Year 1
$5.00 dividend/share paid and one additional share purchased at $125
End of Year 2
$5.00 dividend/share paid and both shares sold for $140 per share
Assuming dividends are not reinvested, compared with the time-weighted return, the money-weighted return is:
A
lower.
B
the same.
C
higher.
A is correct. The following table represents cash flows of the investment:
Year
Contribution
Start-of-Year Value after Contribution
End-of-Year Dividend
End-of-Year Value after Dividend
1
1 × $100
1 × $100 = $100
1 × $5 = $5
$125
2
1 × $125
2 × $125 = $250
2 × $5 = $10
(2 × 140) + 10 = $290
The time-weighted rate of return (TWR) on this investment is found by taking the geometric mean of the two holding period returns (HPRs):
TWR = [(1 + HPR
Year 1
) × (1 + HPR
Year 2
)]
1/2
– 1
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
15
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
where
HPR
Year 1
= ($125 – $100 + $5)/$100 = 30.0%
HPR
Year 2
= ($280 – $250 + $10)/$250 = 16.0%
TWR = [(1 + 0.30) × (1 + 0.16)]
1/2
– 1 = 22.80%
The money-weighted rate of return (MWR) is the internal rate of return (IRR) of the cash flows associated with the investment:
0
100
125
5
1
280
10
1
1
2
= -
+
-
+
(
)
+
(
)
+
+
(
)
+
(
)
r
r
, where r = MWR.
Using the cash flow (CF) function of a financial calculator:
CF
0
= –100, CF
1
= (–125 + 5), CF
2
= (280 + 10), and solving for IRR: MWR or IRR = 20.55%.
The difference between the TWR and MWR of this investment = 22.80% – 20.55% = 2.25%, or 225 bps, with MWR being lower than TWR.
B is incorrect. The difference between MWR and TWR is either higher or lower, and could hardly be equal.
C is incorrect, as per the calculation above.
Discounted Cash Flow Applications
LOS d
Sections 3.1 and 3.2
23
An analyst collects data relating to five commonly used measures of financial leverage and interest coverage for a randomly chosen sample of 300 firms. The data come from those firms’ fiscal year 2013 annual reports. These data are best characterized as:
A
longitudinal.
B
cross sectional.
C
time series.
B is correct. Data on some characteristics of companies at a single point in time are cross-sectional data.
A is incorrect. The data are not longitudinal data. Longitudinal data are observations on characteristic(s) of the same observational unit through time.
C is incorrect. The data are not time-series data. Time-series data are observations of a variable over time
Sampling and Estimation
LOS d
Section 2.3
24
The following information applies to a sample:
●
The point estimate of the population mean is 12.5.
●
The t
-statistic (
t
α/2
) used in calculating the 90% confidence interval is 1.67.
●
The sample size is 64.
●
The sample standard deviation is 5.
The 90% confidence interval for the population mean is closest to:
A
11.98 to 13.02.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
16
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
B
12.37 to 12.63.
C
11.46 to 13.54.
C is correct. The confidence interval for the population mean is calculated as:
X
t
s
n
±
(
)
α
2
where X
is the mean of the sample (12.5), t
α/2
is the appropriate t
-statistic (1.67), s
is the sample standard deviation (5), and n
is the sample size (64). In this problem, the confidence interval is 12.5 ± 1.67 × 5
64
(
)
= 12.5 ± 1.04375 = 11.45625 to 13.54375,
rounded to 11.46
to 13.54
.
A is incorrect. The mistake is to divide 1.67 by 2 rather than use the value as given: 12.5 ± (1.67/2) × 5
64
(
)
= 12.5 ± 0.52188 = 11.97812 to 13.02188, rounded to 11.98 to 13.02.
B is incorrect. The mistake is using 64 instead of the square root of 64 in the calculation: 12.5 ± 1.67 × (5/64) = 12.5 ± 0.13047 = 12.36953 to 12.63047, rounded to 12.37 to 12.63.
Sampling and Estimation
LOS j
Section 4.2
25
Consider a two-tailed test of the hypothesis that the population mean is zero. The sample has 50 observations. The population is normally distributed with a known variance.
t
-Test rejection level
Degrees of freedom
p = 0.10
p = 0.05
p = 0.025
49
1.299
1.677
2.010
50
1.299
1.676
2.009
z
-Test rejection level
α = 0.10
α = 0.05
α = 0.025
1.645
1.960
2.330
At a 0.05 significance level, the rejection points are most likely
at:
A
–2.009 and 2.009.
B
–2.010 and 2.010.
C
–1.960 and 1.960.
C is correct. The appropriate test statistic is a z
-statistic because the sample comes from a normal distributed population with known variance. A z
-test does not use degrees of freedom. This test is two-sided at the 0.05 significance level, and the rejection point conditions are z
> 1.960 and z
< –1.960.
B is incorrect. As explained in choice C.
A is incorrect. As explained in choice C.
Hypothesis Testing
LOS g
Section 3
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
17
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
26
A risk manager would like to calculate the coefficient of variation of a portfolio. The following table reports the annual returns of the portfolio and of the risk- free rate over the most recent five years:
Year
Portfolio Return
Risk-Free Rate
1
4.0%
2.0%
2
–1.0%
1.5%
3
7.0%
1.0%
4
11.0%
1.0%
5
2.0%
0.5%
The coefficient of variation of the portfolio is closest
to:
A
1.00.
B
0.74.
C
0.90.
A is correct. First calculate the sample mean return as follows:
X
X
n
i
i
n
=
=
∑
1
where
n
= the number of observations in the sample
i
= the index for the year
X
i
= is the return in year i
X
=
-
+
+
+
(
)
=
=
4 0
1 0
7 0
11 0
2 0
5
23 0
5
4 6
. %
. %
. %
. %
. %
. %
. %
Then calculate the sample standard deviation with the following formula:
s
X
X
n
i
i
n
=
-
(
)
-
=
∑
2
1
1
Year
X
X
i
-
(
)
2
1
(4.0% – 4.6%)
2
= 0.00004
2
(–1.0% – 4.6%)
2
= 0.00314
3
(7.0% – 4.6%)
2
= 0.00058
4
(11.0% – 4.6%)
2
= 0.00410
5
(2.0% – 4.6%)
2
= 0.00068
s
= 0 00004
0 00314
0 00058
0 00410
0 00068
5
1
.
.
.
.
.
+
+
+
+
-
= 4.62%
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
18
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
The coefficient of variation (CV) is calculated with the following formula: CV = s
X
=
4 62
4 6
.
%
. %
= 1.0
B is incorrect. It is the Sharpe ratio, not the coefficient of variation. First calculate the mean annual risk-free return over the five years:
R
F
=
+
+
+
+
2 0
1 5
1 0
1 0
0 5
5
. %
. %
. %
. %
. %
= 1.2%
Then calculate the Sharpe ratio with the following formula:
S
h
= R
R
s
p
F
p
-
=
-
4 6
1 2
4 62
. %
. %
.
%
= 0.74
C is incorrect. In the formula for the standard deviation, it uses n
instead of “
n – 1” in the denominator:
s
= 0 00004
0 00314
0 00058
0 00410
0 00068
5
.
.
.
.
.
+
+
+
+
= 4.13%
Then, calculate the CV:
CV = 4 13
4 6
.
%
. %
= 0.90
Statistical Concepts and Market Returns
LOS e, g, i
Sections 5.1.2, 7.4.2, 7.7
27
An economist states that the probability of having the gross domestic product (GDP) of a country higher than 3% is 0.20. What are the odds against a GDP higher than 3%?
A
5 to 1
B
6 to 1
C
4 to 1
C is correct. Given the probability of an event, P
(
E
), the odds against that event are: [1 – P
(
E
]/
P
(
E
). By using the input of the problem, Odds against E
= (1 – 0.2)/0.2 = 4. This means that given the probability stated by the economist, the odds against a GDP above 3% are 4 to 1.
A is incorrect. It uses a wrong calculation: (1/0.20) = 5. Thus, 5 to 1.
B is incorrect. It uses a wrong formula: (1 + 0.2)/0.2 = 6. Thus, 6 to 1.
Probability Concepts
LOS c
Section 2
28
The joint probability of returns for securities A and B are as follows:
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
19
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
Joint Probability Function of Security A and Security B Returns (Entries Are Joint Probabilities)
Return on Security B = 30%
Return on Security B = 20%
Return on Security A = 25%
0.60
0
Return on Security A = 20%
0
0.40
The covariance of the returns between Securities A and B is closest
to:
A
12.
B
14.
C
13.
A is correct. First calculate the expected returns on securities A and B with the formula:
E X
P X
X
i
i
i
n
(
)
=
(
)
=
∑
1
Expected return on security A = 0.6 × 25% + 0.4 × 20% = 15% + 8% = 23%
Expected return on security B = 0.6 × 30% + 0.4 × 20% = 18% + 8% = 26%
Then calculate the covariance of returns between securities A and B with the formula:
Cov(
R
A
,
R
B
) = P R
R
R
ER
R
ER
A i
B j
A i
A
B j
B
j
i
,
,
,
,
,
(
)
-
(
)
-
(
)
∑
∑
where
R
A
and R
B
= the returns on securities A and B, respectively
P
= the joint probability
ER
A
and ER
B
= the expected returns of securities A and B, respectively
i
and j
= the line and column of the joint probability function table above
Cov
R
R
A
B
,
.
.
.
(
)
=
-
(
)
-
(
)
+
-
(
)
-
(
)
=
0 6
25
23 30
26
0 4
20
23 20
26
0 6 2
4
0 4
3
6
0 6
8
0 4
18
4 8
7 2
12
×
[
]
+
-
(
)
-
(
)
=
×
+
×
=
+
=
.
.
.
.
.
B is incorrect. In the covariance calculation, it uses the joint probabilities in the wrong positions:
Cov
R
R
A
B
,
.
.
.
(
)
=
-
(
)
-
(
)
+
-
(
)
-
(
)
=
0 4
25
23 30
26
0 6
20
23 20
26
0 4 2
4
0 6
3
6
0 4
8
0 6
18
3 2
10 8
14
×
[
]
+
-
(
)
-
(
)
=
×
+
×
=
+
=
.
.
.
.
.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
20
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
C is incorrect. In the covariance calculation, it uses a joint probability of 0.5:
Cov
R
R
A
B
,
.
.
.
(
)
=
-
(
)
-
(
)
+
-
(
)
-
(
)
=
0 5
25
23 30
26
0 5
20
23 20
26
0 5 2
4
0 5
3
6
0 5
8
0 5
18
4
9
13
×
[
]
+
-
(
)
-
(
)
=
×
+
×
=
+
=
.
.
.
Probability Concepts
LOS m
Section 3
29
An investor deposits £2,000 into an account that pays 6% per annum com-
pounded continuously. The value of the account at the end of four years is closest
to:
A
£2,854.
B
£2,525.
C
£2,542.
C is correct. The future value (FV) of a given lump sum, calculated using continuous compounding, is: FV = PV
e
rN
= 2,000 × e
0.06 × 4
= £2,542.49 ~ £2,542.
A is incorrect. It is calculated as: ln(0.06 × 4) × 2,000 = –2,854.23 and ignores the negative sign of the logarithm.
B is incorrect. It uses annual compounding: 2,000 × (1 + 0.06)
4
= 2,524.95.
The Time Value of Money
LOS d, e
Section 3.2
30
The chart below depicts the relative strength lines for a stock index versus both a bond index and gold. In the month of June, it would be most
appropriate for an analyst using intermarket analysis to move investments from:
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
21
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
Relative Strength
2.6
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.2
2.4
Jan
Dec
Nov
Oct
Sep
Aug
Jul
Jun
May
Apr
Mar
Feb
Stock Index vs. Bond Index
Stock Index vs. Gold
A
gold to stocks.
B
stocks to bonds.
C
bonds to gold.
B is correct. In intermarket analysis, technicians often look for inflection points in one market as a warning sign to start looking for a change in trend in a related market. To identify these intermarket relationships, a commonly used tool is relative strength analysis, which charts the price of one security divided by the price of another. In June, only the dashed line shows an inflection point (a top and reversal of trend) and that is an indication that the stock index started to weaken relative to the bond index. Therefore, it is a signal that the time had come to move investments from stocks to bonds.
A is incorrect. Starting from June, the continuous line is basically flat, indicating that neither stocks nor gold have a relative strength compared to each other (neutral performance).
C is incorrect. Given that from June, bonds indicate relative strength vs. stocks and that there is no relative strength between stocks and gold, it can be inferred that bonds have also a relative strength vs. gold. Therefore, it is not appropriate moving from bonds to gold.
Technical Analysis
LOS h, b
Sections 3.1.8, 5
31
A normally distributed random variable has a mean of 100 and a standard devi-
ation of 12. The probability of observing a value greater than 82 is the cumula-
tive distribution function (cdf) of the standard normal variable:
A
N
(1.5).
B
N
(–1.5).
C
1 – N
(1.5).
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
22
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
A is correct. The standardized value of this normal distribution can be obtained using the formula (
X
– μ)/σ = (82 – 100)/12 = –1.5. The cdf of N
(–1.5) provides the probability of a value less than or equal to 82.
B is incorrect because 1 – N
(1.5) = N
(–1.5) is the probability of a value in this distri-
bution of less than 82.
C is incorrect because the probability of observing random draw less than 82 will be P
(
Z
< –1.5) = N
(–1.5) = 1 – N
(1.5). Common Probability Distributions
LOS l
Section 3.2
32
The following statistical table is presented to an analyst
X
= x
Probability Function P
(
x
) = P
(
X
= x
)
Cumulative Distribution Function F
(
x
) = P
(
X
≤ x
)
1
0.10
0.10
2
0.15
0.25
3
0.50
0.75
4
0.15
0.90
5
0.10
1.00
Which of the following is the best
conclusion that can be drawn from the statis-
tical table?
A
The probability that the value of X
will be equal to 4 is 0.90
B
The probability that the value of X
will be less than or equal to 5 but greater than 2 is 0.75.
C
The random variable X
is continuous.
B is correct. The probability that X
is greater than 2 but less than or equal to 5 is: P
(2 < X
≤ 5) = [
P
(
X
≤ 5) – P
(
X
≤ 2)] = 1.00 – 0.25 = 0.75.
A is incorrect because a random variable value of X
= 4 has a 15% probability of occurring. The cumulative probability of 90% shows the probability of X
≤ 4.
C is incorrect because the random variable has a countable number of possible values; the probability and cumulative distribution functions are therefore for a discrete random variable is therefore discrete.
Common Probability Distributions
LOS d
Section 2
33
To project the assets and liabilities of a pension plan using a number of different assumptions, the most appropriate method to employ is:
A
Monte Carlo simulation because it can evaluate the effect of changes in assumptions.
B
Monte Carlo simulation because it can provide more insights into cause and effect relationships than analytical methods.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
23
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
C
historical simulation because risk not represented in the time period observed can be integrated in the simulation.
A is correct. Monte Carlo simulation is better suited to hypothetical “what if” analysis than historical simulation. To model a pension plan’s status under a number of different hypothetical assumptions affecting the assets and liabilities, Monte Carlo simulation is the most appropriate method
B is incorrect because Monte Carlo simulation is not an analytical method that can provide great insights into cause and effect relationships. It is a complement to analytical methods.
C is incorrect because historical simulation is not as well suited to hypothetical “what if” analysis as is Monte Carlo simulation. While historical simulation is easier to model because it relies on data from the past to predict future probability distributions, it is not as well suited for meeting the goal of projecting the plan’s assets and liabilities under different assumptions.
Common Probability Distributions
LOS q
Section 4
34
If the quantity demanded of pears falls by 4% when the price of apples decreases by 3%, then apples and pears are best described as:
A
complements.
B
substitutes.
C
inferior goods.
B is correct. The cross-price elasticity of demand is defined as the percentage change in quantity demanded divided by the percentage change in the price of a substitute or complement. If the cross-price elasticity of demand is positive, the goods are substitutes. In this case, the 4 percent decline in quantity of pears is divided by the 3 percent decline in the price of apples, which is a positive number:
–4/–3 = +1.33
A is incorrect because the cross-price elasticity of demand between pears and apples is positive. Complements have a negative cross-price elasticity of demand.
C is incorrect because inferior goods relates to income elasticity of demand, not cross-price elasticity.
Topics in Demand and Supply Analysis
LOS a
Section 2.4
35
According to the Solow neoclassical growth model, sustained long-term growth in potential GDP is best
explained by:
A
capital deepening investments.
B
technological change.
C
growth in labor supply.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
24
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
B is correct. Growth in potential GDP equals growth in technology plus the weighted average growth rate of labor and capital. Because of diminishing marginal productivity (return), the only way to sustain long-term growth in potential GDP is through techno-
logical change or growth in total factor productivity.
A is incorrect. Growth in potential GDP equals growth in technology plus the weighted average growth rate of labor and capital. Because of diminishing marginal productivity (return), the only way to sustain long-term growth in potential GDP is through techno-
logical change or growth in total factor productivity.
C is incorrect. Growth in potential GDP equals growth in technology plus the weighted average growth rate of labor and capital. Because of diminishing marginal productivity (return), the only way to sustain long-term growth in potential GDP is through techno-
logical change or growth in total factor productivity.
Aggregate Output, Prices, and Economic Growth
LOS n, o
Section 4.1
36
A positive movement in a lagging indicator would least likely
be used to:
A
confirm that an expansion is currently underway.
B
identify a past condition of the economy.
C
identify an expected future economic upturn.
C is correct. A positive movement in a lagging indicator would most likely be used to confirm that an existing expansion is underway or has already occurred. Only a leading indicator would help identify or predict a future economic event.
A is incorrect. A positive move in a lagging indicator by itself is insufficient to indicate a positive expansion. However, confirmation would be required from positive changes in a coincident indicator to indicate expansion.
B is incorrect. A positive move in a lagging indicator is most likely identifying an upturn in economic activity that occurred in the past.
Understanding Business Cycles
LOS i
Section 5
37
Which of the following is the least likely
outcome when a monopolist adopts first-degree price discrimination because of customers’ differing demand elasticities?
A
The output increases to the point at which price equals the marginal cost.
B
The monopolist shares the total surplus with consumers.
C
The price for a marginal unit decreases to less than the price for other units.
B is correct. In a monopoly, perfect price discrimination results in the total surplus being kept by the producer, the monopolist.
C is incorrect. When a monopolist adopts perfect price discrimination, the price for the marginal unit will be lower than average price.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
25
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
A is incorrect. Under perfect price discrimination, output increases to the point where price equals marginal cost.
The Firm and Market Structures
LOS f
Section 6.4
38
If the scale of a single producer is small relative to the demand for an undiffer-
entiated good, the market structure of the producer is best
described as being:
A
an oligopoly.
B
monopolistic competition.
C
perfect competition.
C is correct. Perfect competition involves the sale of a homogeneous product by many sellers; monopolistic competition may also involve many sellers, but its product is differentiated.
A is incorrect. Oligopolies involve only a few sellers.
B is incorrect. Firms in monopolistic competition sell differentiated products although there may be many of these firms.
The Firm and Market Structures
LOS a
Section 2.2
39
The following data apply to a country in its domestic currency units:
Consumer spending on goods and services
875,060
Government spending on goods and services
305,600
Business gross fixed investment
286,400
Government gross fixed investment
84,120
Change in inventories
–68,500
Capital consumption allowance
8,540
Transfer payments
9,300
Statistical discrepancy
–2,850
Exports
219,800
Imports
250,980
Using the expenditures approach, the country’s GDP is closest
to:
A
1,466,490.
B
1,451,500.
C
1,448,650.
C is correct. Using the expenditures approach:
GDP = Consumer spending on goods and services + Business gross fixed investment + Change in inventories + Government spending on goods and services + Government
gross fixed investment + Exports – Imports + Statistical discrepancy
Consumer spending on goods and services
875,060
Business gross fixed investment
286,400
(continued)
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
26
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
Change in inventories
(68,500)
Government spending on goods and services
305,600
Government gross fixed investment
84,120
Exports
219,800
Imports
(250,980)
Statistical discrepancy
(2,850)
= Gross domestic product (GDP)
1,448,650
A is incorrect. It includes all items including transfer payments and capital consump-
tion allowance, which are components of the income approach.
= 1,448,650 + 9,300 + 8,540 = 1,466,490
B is incorrect. It ignores statistical discrepancy.
= 1,448,650 + 2,850 = 1,451,500
Aggregate Output, Prices, and Economic Growth
LOS a
Sections 2.2, 2.3
40
Which of the following statements is most
accurate based on the FX quotations in the table?
Spot Rate
One-Year Forward Rate
USD/EUR
1.2952
1.3001
A
The forward rate is trading at a discount to the spot rate by 0.0049 points.
B
The euro is trading at a forward premium of 49 points.
C
The US dollar is trading at a forward premium of 49 points.
B is correct. Forward premium = Forward rate – Spot rate = 1.3001 – 1.2952 = 0.0049. To convert to points, scale four decimal places—that is, multiply by 10,000 = 10,000 × 0.0049 = 49 points. Because the forward rate exceeds the spot rate for the base currency (euro), the euro is trading at a forward premium of 49 points.
C is incorrect. When the forward rate (1.3001) is higher than the spot rate (1.2952), the base currency (EUR) is said to be trading at a forward premium, not a discount, to the price currency (USD).
A is incorrect. When the forward rate (1.3001) is higher than the spot rate (1.2952), the forward points are positive, and the forward rate is said to be trading at a premium to the spot rate. The wrong number is derived from 1.3001 – 1.2952 = 0.0049. The USD/
EUR is quoted to four decimal places, so it needs to be scaled up by four decimal places or multiplied by 10,000 to 49 points.
Currency Exchange Rates
LOS g
Section 3.3
41
Assume that a central bank has decided to lower interest rates in the economy. To carry out this policy, the central bank will most likely
:
A
increase required reserve requirements.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
27
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
B
buy securities.
C
sell securities.
B is correct. In implementing monetary policy, central banks have three primary tools available to them: open market operations, setting the official policy rate, and reserve requirements. When the central bank purchases securities (open market operations), it increases the reserves held by private sector banks. These increased reserves lead to a reduction in interest rates on money market securities and, ultimately, to a reduction in other interest rates in the economy
A is incorrect. An increased reserve requirement reduces the money supply (as banks can lend out less) and leads to higher interest rates
C is incorrect. If the central bank sells securities, reserves fall and interest rates are likely to increase.
Monetary and Fiscal Policy
LOS h
Sections 2.3.2.1, 2.3.2.2
42
According to the concept of money neutrality, over the long term, the money supply is least likely
to affect:
A
inflation expectations.
B
inflation.
C
the real rate of interest.
C is correct. The concept of money neutrality implies that an increase in the money supply will leave real variables like output and employment unaffected. The real rate of interest will be unaffected by money supply changes but inflation and inflation expec-
tations will be affected.
B is incorrect. According to money neutrality, real variables are not affected by changes in money supply but inflation will be.
A is incorrect. According to money neutrality, real variables are not affected by changes in money supply but inflation expectations can be.
Monetary and Fiscal Policy
LOS d, e
Sections 2.1.6, 2.1.7
43
Which of the following events would most likely
have a positive impact on the GDP of Switzerland and the gross national product (GNP) of France?
A
An industrial components manufacturer in France produces industrial com-
ponents in France using Swiss workers.
B
A Swiss company purchases machine tools from a manufacturing firm located in France.
C
An accounting firm located in France provides accounting services to a manufacturer located in Switzerland.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
28
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
C is correct. GDP measures the market value of all final goods and services produced by factors of production (such as labor and capital) located within a country, therefore Swiss GDP includes the accounting services provided within Switzerland. GNP measures the market value of all final goods and services produced by factors of production supplied by residents of a country, regardless of whether such production takes place within the country or outside of the country. Therefore, GNP includes the accounting services produced by a French citizen abroad.
A is incorrect. The production in France (outside of Switzerland) will not have a positive impact on Swiss GDP. Although it will be included in France’s GDP (production in France by nationals and foreigners), it will not be included in France’s GNP. GNP only includes value of goods and services produced by a country’s residents.
B is incorrect. The purchase of French machine tools is an import which reduces Swiss GDP.
International Trade and Capital Flows
LOS a, h
Sections 2.1, 4.4
44
A member of the labor force quit her job last week and will begin a new job next week. During this interim period, for the purposes of calculating unem-
ployment statistics, this person is most likely
classified as:
A
hidden unemployed.
B
frictionally unemployed.
C
voluntarily unemployed.
B is correct. Frictional unemployment is short term and transitory in nature; it includes people who are “between jobs,” as in this case, and those who are not working because they are taking time to search for a job that better matches their skills, interests, and other preferences.
A is incorrect. The hidden unemployed encompass discouraged workers and under-
employed people. Discouraged workers are those who have stopped looking for a job, and the underemployed are those who have a job but have qualifications to work at significantly higher paying jobs.
C is incorrect. Although this person likely left their old job voluntarily, frictionally unemployed is a better answer here because they do have a job waiting for them. The voluntarily unemployed are persons outside the labor force who might refuse an available vacancy if the pay rate is below their reservation wage or those who might have retired early.
Understanding Business Cycles
LOS d
Section 4.1
45
The primary goal of both monetary and fiscal policy focuses on balancing eco-
nomic growth and:
A
income distribution.
B
inflation.
C
employment.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
29
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
B is correct. The goal of both monetary and fiscal policy is the creation of an economic environment characterized by positive, stable growth and low, stable inflation.
A is incorrect because the distribution of income (and wealth) lies within the purview of fiscal policy involving the government’s decisions concerning spending and taxes. By contrast, monetary policy refers to central bank activities directed toward influencing the quantity of money and credit in an economy. Income distribution is not a policy domain of monetary policy.
C is incorrect because the overarching goal of monetary and fiscal policy is to create economic conditions characterized by positive, stable economic growth and low, stable inflation. Achieving this goal promotes stability (rather than cyclicality) in employment, consumption, and saving/investment outcomes.
Monetary and Fiscal Policy
LOS a
Section 1
46
An accounting document that records transactions in the order in which they occur is best
described as a:
A
trial balance.
B
general ledger.
C
general journal.
C is correct. The general journal records transactions in the order in which they occur (chronological order) and is thus sorted by date.
A is incorrect. The trial balance lists all account balances at a particular point in time.
B is incorrect. The general ledger is a document that shows all business transactions by account.
Financial Reporting Mechanics
LOS g
Section 6.1
47
Which of the following statements best
describes the role of the International Organization of Securities Commissions (IOSCO)? The IOSCO
A
is the oversight body to which the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) reports.
B
is responsible for regulating financial markets of member nations.
C
assists in attaining the goal of cross-border cooperation in combating viola-
tions of securities laws.
C is correct. The IOSCO is not a regulator of financial markets. Its role is to assist in attaining the goal of uniform regulation and enforcement of international financial standards and in attaining the goal of cross-border cooperation in combating violations of securities and derivative laws.
A is incorrect. The IOSCO assists in attaining the goal of uniform regulation of inter-
national financial standards including IFRS, but the IASB does not report to it.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
30
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
B is incorrect. The IOSCO is not a regulatory authority.
Financial Reporting Standards
LOS b
Section 3.2.1
48
The following information is available on a company for the current year.
Net income
$1,000,000
Average number of common shares outstanding
100,000
Details of convertible securities outstanding:
Convertible preferred shares outstanding
2,000
Dividend/share
$10
Each preferred share is convertible into five shares of common stock
Convertible bonds, $100 face value per bond
$80,000
8% coupon
Each bond is convertible into 25 shares of common stock
Corporate tax rate
40%
The company’s diluted EPS is closest
to:
A
$7.72.
B
$7.57.
C
$7.69.
A is correct. Because both the preferred shares and the bonds are dilutive, they should both be converted to calculate the diluted EPS. Diluted EPS is the lowest possible value.
Basic EPS
Diluted EPS: Bond Converted
Diluted EPS: Preferred Converted
Diluted EPS: Both Converted
Net income
$1,000,000
$1,000,000
$1,000,000
$1,000,000
Preferred dividends
–$20,000
–$20,000
0
0
After-tax cost of interest 8% × $80,000 × (1 – 0.40)
$3,840
$3,840
Numerator
$980,000
$983,840
$1,000,000
$1,003,840
Average common shares outstanding
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
Preferred converted
10,000
10,000
Bond converted
20,000
20,000
Denominator
100,000
120,000
110,000
130,000
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
31
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
Basic EPS
Diluted EPS: Bond Converted
Diluted EPS: Preferred Converted
Diluted EPS: Both Converted
EPS
$9.80
$8.20
$9.09
$7.72
B is incorrect. Preferred dividends were included after preferred conversion (see table).
C is incorrect. After-tax interest on bonds was not added back after bond conversion: after-tax interest is (1 – 0.40) × 8% × $80,000 = 3,840 (see table).
Understanding Income Statements
LOS h, i
Sections 6.2, 6.3
49
For which of the following inventory valuation methods is the gross profit mar-
gin least likely
to be the same under both a perpetual inventory system and a periodic inventory system?
A
LIFO
B
Specific identification
C
FIFO
A is correct. The periodic and perpetual systems result in the same inventory and cost of goods sold values (and thus gross profit margin) using both FIFO and specific identi-
fication valuation methods, but not always under LIFO.
B is incorrect. The periodic and perpetual systems result in the same inventory and cost of goods sold values (and thus gross profit margin) using both FIFO and specific identification valuation methods, but not always under LIFO.
C is incorrect. The periodic and perpetual systems result in the same inventory and cost of goods sold values (and thus gross profit margin) using both FIFO and specific identification valuation methods, but not always under LIFO.
Inventories
LOS c
Section 3.6
50
Under International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS), which of the follow-
ing financial statement elements most accurately represents inflows of economic resources to a company?
A
Revenues
B
Assets
C
Owners’ equity
A is correct. The financial statement elements under IFRS are assets, liabilities, owners’ equity, revenue, and expenses. Revenues are inflows of economic resources. Assets are economic resources but not inflows. Equity is the residual claim on those economic resources.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
32
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
B is incorrect. Assets are economic resources, but not inflows.
C is incorrect. Equity is a residual claim on economic resources.
Financial Reporting Mechanics
LOS b
Section 3
51
Under IFRS, which of the following balance sheet presentation formats is
most
acceptable? Classifying assets and liabilities:
A
into operating, investing, and financing categories.
B
in liquidity order.
C
as monetary vs. non-monetary.
B is correct. A liquidity-based presentation can be used when it provides information that is reliable and more relevant. Entities that typically choose this format include banks.
A is incorrect. Cash flow statements are divided into these categories.
C is incorrect. The monetary/non-monetary categorization would be required in prepa-
ration for translating the balance sheet of a foreign subsidiary because different exchange rates apply. However, this approach is not an acceptable balance sheet reporting format.
Understanding Balance Sheets
LOS c
Section 2.2, 2.3
52
Previously, a manufacturer of high-quality industrial electrical generators only sold its units to customers, but it has just introduced a leasing program. The generators have expected useful lives of about 25 years, and the company antic-
ipates that the leases will have a term of 20 years or more. The company reports under International Financial Reporting Standards. Which of the following statements about the first year of the new leasing program is most accurate?
A
Regardless of how the company classifies the lease, its total cash flow and operating cash flow will be the same.
B
If the lease is classified as an operating lease, the company’s profits should be higher for a given leased asset than they would be under a finance lease.
C
If the lease is classified as a finance lease, it will decrease the company’s liquidity position compared with when the company was only selling its generators.
C is correct. Whether the company sells or leases the asset, inventory will be reduced. For sales, the company would report an accounts receivable classified as a current asset (assuming sales terms are not in question). If the leases qualify as finance leases, then the company will report a lease receivable, which is primarily long term. Therefore, compared with selling units outright, the company’s current assets are lower under leasing and its liquidity position will decrease.
A is incorrect. Total cash flow over the lease term under the two different methods of lease accounting will be the same, but the total operating cash flows will not be: operating cash flows will be lower under the finance lease, but investing cash flows will be higher.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
33
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
B is incorrect. Total profits over a lease term under the two different methods of lease accounting will be the same, but net income will be higher in the early years of the finance lease compared to the net of lease revenues less depreciation reported under an operating lease.
Long-Lived Assets
LOS p
Section 9.2.2
Non-Current (Long-Term) Liabilities
LOS g
Section 3.2.2
53
The most
appropriate treatment for intangible assets with indefinite useful lives is to:
A
expense.
B
capitalize with no amortization.
C
capitalize and amortize.
B is correct. Intangible assets assumed to have indefinite useful lives (i.e., no foreseeable limit to the period over which the asset is expected to generate net cash inflows for the company) are capitalized and not amortized.
A is incorrect. Acceptable amortization methods for intangible assets are the same as those for deprecation, but given that the intangible has an indefinite life, expensing it is not an option.
C is incorrect. Acceptable amortization methods for intangible assets are the same as those for deprecation, but given that the intangible has an indefinite life, the straight- line method is not an option.
Long-Lived Assets
LOS f
Section 3.2
54
The following data are available on a company:
Metric
Working capital
$60 million
Non-current assets
$235 million
Equity
$170 million
Current ratio
1.75
The company’s financial leverage is closest
to:
A
1.7.
B
2.2.
C
1.2.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
34
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
B is correct. First determine current assets, where CA = Current assets, CL = Current liabilities, WC = Working capital, and CR = Current ratio.
CR = CA/CL = 1.75
CL = CA/1.75
WC = CA – CL
60 = CA – CA/1.75
60 = 0.75/1.75 × CA
CA = 140
Then solve for total assets and determine financial leverage:
Metric
Current assets
$140 million
Non-current assets
+ $235 million
Total assets
$375 million
Equity
$170 million
Financial leverage = Total assets/Equity
2.2
A is incorrect. Instead of calculating total assets, the sum of non-current assets and working capital was used:
Metric (all $ amounts in millions)
Working capital
60
Non-current assets
+ 235
Incorrect total assets
295
Equity
170
Financial leverage = Total assets/Equity
1.7
C is incorrect. Instead of calculating financial leverage, total liabilities to equity was calculated:
Metric (all $ amounts in millions)
Total assets per calculation above
375
Less: Equity
–170
Total liabilities
205
Incorrect Financial leverage calculation (Total liabilities/Equity)
1.2
Understanding Balance Sheets
LOS h
Section 7.2
55
Selected information from a company’s comparative income statement and balance sheet is presented below:
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
35
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
Selected Income Statement Data for the Year Ended 31 August ($ thousands)
2013
2012
Sales revenue
100,000
95,000
Cost of goods sold
47,000
47,500
Depreciation expense
4,000
3,500
Net Income
11,122
4,556
Selected Balance Sheet Data as of 31 August ($ thousands)
2013
2012
Current Assets
Cash and investments
21,122
25,000
Accounts receivable
25,000
13,500
Inventories
13,000
8,500
Total current assets
59,122
47,000
Current liabilities
Accounts payable
15,000
15,000
Other current liabilities
7,000
9,000
Total current liabilities
22,000
24,000
The cash collected from customers in 2013 is closest
to:
A
$111,500.
B
$96,100.
C
$88,500.
C is correct. Cash collected from customers = Revenues – Increase in accounts receivable
= $100 – (25 – 13.5)
= $88.5 thousand
A is incorrect. It adds the increase in accounts receivable to sales: $100 + (25 – 13.5) = 111.5.
B is incorrect. It deducts the decrease in cash from revenues: 100 – (25 – 21.1) = 96.1.
Understanding Cash Flow Statements
LOS e, f
Section 3.2.1.1
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
36
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
56
The following information is available about a company for its current fiscal year:
Accounting profit (earnings before taxes)
$250,000
Taxable income
$215,000
Tax rate
30%
Income taxes paid in year
$61,200
Deferred tax liability, start of year
$82,400
Deferred tax liability, end of year
$90,650
The income tax expense reported on the current year’s statement of earnings is closest
to:
A
$72,750.
B
$69,450.
C
$64,500.
A is correct. Income tax expense equals income tax payable (the tax rate multiplied by the taxable income) plus the increase in the deferred tax liabilities.
(0.30 × $215,000) + ($90,650 – $82,400) = $64,500 + $8,250 = $72,750
B is incorrect. It is the tax paid plus the increase in deferred taxes: 61,200 + 8,250 = 69,450.
C is incorrect it is just the tax rate × the taxable income: 30 × 215,000 = 64,500.
Income Taxes
LOS a, d
Section 2
57
On 1 January 2014, the market rate of interest on a company’s bonds is 5%, and it issues a bond with the following characteristics:
Face value
€50 million
Coupon rate, paid annually
4%
Time to maturity
10 years (31 December 2023)
Issue price (per €100)
€92.28
If the company uses International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS), its interest expense (in millions) in 2014 is closest
to:
A
€2.307.
B
€2.386.
C
€1.846.
A is correct. IFRS requires the effective interest method for the amortization of bond discounts/premiums. The bond is issued for 0.9228 × €50 million = €46.140.
Interest expense = Liability value × Market rate at issuance = 0.05 × €46.140 = €2.307
C is incorrect. It uses the coupon rate of 4% × 46.140 = 1.8456.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
37
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
B is incorrect. It uses the straight-line method of bond amortization, which is allowed under US GAAP but not IFRS.
50 × 4% – [(100 – 92.28) × 50]/10 years = 2 + 386,000 = 2.386
Non-Current (Long-Term) Liabilities
LOS b
Section 2.2
58
A company that prepares its financial statements according to US GAAP leased a piece of equipment on 1 January 2013. Information relevant to the transaction is as follows:
●
●
Five annual lease payments of $25,000, with the first payment due 1
January 2013
●
●
Interest rate on similar company debt is currently 8%
●
●
The fair value of the equipment is $115,000
●
●
Useful life of the equipment is seven years
●
●
The company depreciates other equipment in the same asset class on a
straight-line basis
The total expense related to the lease on the company’s 2013 income statement will be closest
to:
A
$25,000.
B
$28,185.
C
$22,024.
B is correct. The lease would qualify as a finance (capital) lease under US GAAP because the present value (PV) of the lease payments is more than 90% of the fair value.
Using a financial calculator for an annuity due at the beginning of the period:
PV of lease payments: PMT = $25,000, i
= 8%, N
= 5, Mode = Begin, Compute PV.
PV = $107,803, 90% of the fair value: 0.90 × $115,000 = $103,500
Therefore, the lease is greater than 90% and would be capitalized at $107,803.
Present value of the lease (asset value capital-
ized and initial liability)
$107,803
Payment 1 January 2013
–25,000
Liability value 1 January 2013
$82,803
Interest expense in 2013
0.08 × $82,803
$6,624.25
Amortization expense for the year using the lease term as the useful life (no indication that the lease will be renewed beyond the initial term)
$107,803/5
$21,560.63
Total expense in 2013
$28,184.88
A is incorrect. It assumes it is an operating lease and simply deducts the lease pay-
ment. If you do not calculate the PV as an annuity due then it does not trip the criteria and you would incorrectly classify it as operating. N
= 5, i
= 8, PMT = 25,000, PV = 99,817 vs. 90% of 115,000 = 103,500.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
38
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
C is incorrect. It correctly classifies it as a finance lease but amortizes it over 7 years: 107,803/7 = 15,400; 15,400 + 6,624 = 22,024.
Non-Current (Long-Term) Liabilities
LOS g, h
Section 3.2.1
59
An equity analyst is forecasting next year’s net profit margin of a heavy equip-
ment manufacturing firm by using the average net profit margin over the past three years. In making his profit projection, he identifies the following three items:
1
The company reported losses from discontinued operations in each of the past three years.
2
The most recent year’s tax rate was only half of the prior two years’ rate as a result of a fiscal stimulus.
3
The company reported gains on the sale of investments in each of the past three years.
Which of the following statements about the preparation of the forecast is most
accurate? The analyst would:
A
use the most recent tax rate because it is the best predictor of future tax rates.
B
exclude the gains on the sale from investments because the company is a manufacturing firm.
C
include the losses from discontinued operations because they appear to be an ongoing feature for this company.
B is correct. The company is a heavy equipment manufacturer. Because gains on invest-
ments are not a core part of the company’s business, they should not be viewed as an ongoing source of earnings. Discontinued operations are considered to be non-recurring items (even though they have occurred in the past three years); they are normally treated as random and unsustainable and should not be included in a short-term forecast. The change in the current tax rate is best viewed as temporary in the absence of additional information and should not be the basis of the calculation of the average tax rate.
A is incorrect. The long(er) run tax rate should be used; the change in the current tax rate is best viewed as temporary in the absence of additional information and should not be the basis of the calculation of the average tax rate.
C is incorrect. The discontinued items should be considered random and unsustain-
able for a short-term forecast.
Understanding Income Statements
LOS f
Sections 5.1, 5.5
Financial Statement Analysis: Applications
LOS b
Section 3
60
A company has consistently and significantly increased its cash balance over the past three years. The least likely
explanation for the increase in cash is a:
A
forthcoming issue of new equity.
B
potential acquisition.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
39
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
C
planned increase in the dividend.
A is correct. A new equity issue will provide additional cash, so it does not explain an increase in cash holdings prior to the issue.
B is incorrect. A company might increase its cash to build a “war chest” in order to make an acquisition.
C is incorrect. A company might increase its cash to pay a larger dividend.
Financial Statement Analysis: Applications
LOS a
Section 2
61
The financial statement that would be most
useful to an analyst in understand-
ing the changes that have occurred in a company’s retained earnings over a year is the statement of:
A
comprehensive income.
B
financial position.
C
changes in equity.
C is correct. The statement of changes in equity reports the changes in the components of shareholders’ equity over the year, which would include the retained earnings account.
A is incorrect. The net income determined in the calculation of comprehensive income is a component of the change in retained earnings, but there are other changes that may also have occurred (the payment of dividends, for example) that are not included on the statement of comprehensive income.
B is incorrect. Although the year-end balances of retained earnings may be reported on the statement of financial position (depending on if the company breaks out the components of shareholders’ equity), it would not detail the changes over the year.
Financial Statement Analysis: An Introduction
LOS b
Section 3.1.3
62
Under US GAAP, interest paid is most likely
included in which of the following cash flow activities?
A
Operating only
B
Financing only
C
Either operating or financing
A is correct. Interest paid must be categorized as an operating cash flow activity under US GAAP, although it can be categorized as either an operating or financing cash flow activity under IFRS.
B is incorrect. Interest paid cannot be categorized as a financing cash flow under US GAAP but can be under IFRS.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
40
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
C is incorrect. Interest paid cannot be categorized as a financing cash flow under US GAAP but can be under IFRS.
Understanding Cash Flow Statements
LOS a, c
Section 3.2.1.5
63
A firm reported the following financial statement items:
€ millions
Net income
2,100
Non-cash charges
400
Interest expense
300
Capital expenditures
210
Working capital expenditures
0
Net borrowing
1,600
Tax rate
40%
The free cash flow to the firm (FCFF) is closest
to:
A
€2,110.
B
€2,470.
C
€2,590.
B is correct. FCFF = NI + NCC + Int(1 – t
) – FCInv – WCInv
Cash Flow Item
Amount (€ millions)
NI
Net income
2,100
NCC
Plus non-cash charges
400
Int(1 – t
)
Plus interest expense (1 – tax rate)
300 (1 – 0.40)
180
FCInv
Less capital expenditures
(210)
WCInv
Less working capital expenditures
0
FCFF
Free cash flow to the firm
€2,470
A is incorrect. It incorrectly subtracted interest expense.
Cash Flow Item
Amount (€)
Net income
+
€2,100
Non-cash charges
+
400
Capital expenditure
–
210
Interest Expense: Int × (1 –
t
)
–
180
FCFF
€2,110
C is incorrect. It ignores the tax effect on interest expense.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
41
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
Cash Flow Item
Amount (€)
Net income
2,100
Plus Non-cash charges
400
Plus Interest expense
300
Less Capital expenditure
(210)
Less working capital expenditures
0
FCFF
€2,590
Understanding Cash Flow Statements
LOS i
Section 4.3
64
The following information is from a company’s accounting records:
€ millions
Revenues for the year
12,500
Total expenses for the year
10,000
Gains from available-for-sale securities
1,475
Loss on foreign currency translation adjustments on a foreign subsidiary
325
Dividends paid
500
The company’s total comprehensive income (in € millions) is closest to:
A
1,150.
B
3,150.
C
3,650.
C is correct. Total comprehensive income = Net income + Other comprehensive income
Net Income = Revenues – Expenses.
Other comprehensive income includes gains or losses on available-for-sale (AFS) securities and translation adjustments on foreign subsidiaries.
(Revenues – Expenses) + Gain on AFS securities – Loss on FX translation
(12,500 – 10,000) + 1,475 – 325 = 3,650.
A is incorrect because it is just the other comprehensive income (1,475 – 325) and not the total comprehensive income.
B is incorrect because it also deducts dividends, which are deducted when calculating the change in shareholders’ equity but not total comprehensive income.
Understanding Income Statements
LOS l, m
Section 8
65
Under US GAAP, which of the following is least likely
a disclosure concerning inventory?
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
42
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
A
The amount of inventories recognized as an expense during the period
B
The carrying amounts of inventories carried at fair value less costs to sell
C
The amount of the reversal of any write-down of inventories
C is correct. US GAAP does not permit the reversal of prior year write-downs; therefore, there are no disclosures related to reversals.
A is incorrect. Under both US GAAP and IFRS, disclosure is required about the amount of inventories expensed during the period (cost of goods sold).
B is incorrect. Both US GAAP and IFRS require disclosures of any inventories carried at fair value less costs to sell (NRV).
Inventories
LOS i
Section 7.1
66
Which of the following accounting actions would increase stockholders’ equity in the current period?
A
Using LIFO rather than FIFO accounting for inventory in an inflationary environment.
B
Capitalizing, rather than expensing, a payment.
C
Increasing the allowance for uncollectible accounts receivable.
B is correct. The capitalization of payments is an example of how choices affect both the balance sheet and income statement. Capitalizing a payment changes the benefit from only the current period—making it an expense—to a benefit in future periods as an asset. The creation of an asset results in a comparable increase in stockholder’s equity.
A is incorrect because adopting last-in,-first-out accounting for inventory in an inflationary environment assumes newer and costlier purchases of inventory are sold to customers with the result that the remaining inventory reflects the older costs. This will contribute to lower net income from sales and a decrease in stockholders’ equity
C is incorrect because increasing the allowance for uncollectible accounts receivable will increase the uncollectible accounts expense reported for the period. This will con-
tribute to lower net income and a decrease in stockholders’ equity.
Financial Reporting Quality
LOS h
Section 4.2.1
67
Conservative, rather than aggressive, accounting is most likely associated with:
A
increased sustainability of earnings.
B
higher current reported performance.
C
recognition of losses once certain.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
43
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
A is correct. Conservative accounting choices decrease a company’s reported performance and results in the current period and may increase its reported performance and financial position in later periods. Therefore, it typically avoids a sustainability issue.
B is incorrect because higher current reported performance is a result associated with aggressive accounting choices, not conservative ones.
C is incorrect because in general, conservatism means that losses are recognized when probable; waiting to recognize losses until they are certain would be an aggressive approach rather than a conservative one.
Financial Reporting Quality
LOS c
Section 2.5.1
68
Using the data below, an analyst is in the process of comparing two companies (A and B) that are in the same industry.
Company A (in $ millions, except per share data)
Net income
$7,098
Weighted average common shares outstanding
4,366
Common share dividends
$1,700
Stock price per share at year-end
$41.00
Company B
Basic EPS
$4.35
Earnings multiple
21.17×
Dividend payout ratio
25.9%
Compared with Company B, Company A most likely
has a higher:
A
price-to-earnings ratio.
B
dividend payout ratio.
C
earnings per share.
A is correct. Company A has a higher price-to-earnings ratio (P/E). Its P/E of 25.15× is calculated as follows:
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
44
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
Calculation
Company A
Comment
EPS
Net income/Weighted average number of common shares outstanding = 7,098/4,366 =
$1.63
Lower than B ($4.35)
P/E
Market price/EPS = 41.00/1.63 =
25.15×
Higher than B (21.17×)
Dividend payout
Common share dividends/Net income = 1,700/7,098 =
24.0%
Lower than B (25.9%)
B is incorrect because Company A has a lower dividend payout than Company B: 24.0% vs. 25.9%.
C is incorrect because Company A has a lower EPS than Company B: 1.63 vs. 4.35.
Financial Analysis Techniques
LOS e
Section 5.1
Understanding Income Statements
LOS h
Section 6.2
69
The following information is available for a company:
2016 (in € millions)
EBIT (earnings before interest and taxes)
1,015.0
Interest expense
73.4
Tax expense
201.4
Total assets
5,305.0
Average total assets
5,421.0
Total debt
1,048.0
2015
Interest coverage
15.3×
Debt to total assets
18.2%
Operating return on assets (ROA)
17.3%
Compared with 2015, which of the following ratios most likely
indicates an improvement in the creditworthiness of the company? The change in the company’s:
A
operating ROA.
B
debt-to-total assets.
C
interest coverage.
A is correct. When calculated for 2016, interest coverage decreased and debt to total assets and return on assets both increased. In general, a decrease in interest coverage and an increase in debt to total assets would reduce creditworthiness, but an increase in return on assets would improve creditworthiness. Calculations are as follows:
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
45
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
Calculation
2016
Comment
Debt to total assets
Total debt/
Total assets = €1,048/€5,305 =
19.8%
Higher than 2015 (18.2%), which would reduce creditworthiness
Interest coverage
EBIT/Interest payments = €1,015/€73.4 =
13.8×
Lower than 2015 (15.3×), which would reduce creditworthiness
Operating ROA
EBIT/Average total assets = €1,015/€5,421 =
18.7%
Higher than 2015 (17.3%), which would improve creditworthiness
B is incorrect because an increase in debt-to-total assets would likely reduce creditworthiness.
C is incorrect because a decrease in the interest coverage ratio would likely reduce creditworthiness.
Financial Analysis Techniques
LOS e
Section 6
70
A 20-year $1,000 fixed-rate non-callable bond with 8% annual coupons cur-
rently sells for $1,105.94. Assuming a 30% marginal tax rate and an additional risk premium for equity relative to debt of 5%, the cost of equity using the bond-yield-plus-risk-premium approach is closest
to:
A
9.9%
B
12.0%
C
13.0%
B is correct. First, determine the yield to maturity, which is the discount rate that sets the bond price to $1,105.94 and is equal to 7%. This calculation can be done with a financial calculator:
FV = –$1,000, PV = $1,105.94, N
= 20, PMT = –$80, solve for i
, which will equal 7%.
The bond-yield-plus-risk-premium approach is calculated by adding a risk premium to the cost of debt (i.e., the yield to maturity for the debt), making the cost of equity 12.00% (= 7% +5%).
A is incorrect because it uses the after-tax cost of debt: 9.90% = 7% × (1 – 30%) + 5%.
C is incorrect because it uses the coupon rate instead of the yield-to-maturity: 13.00% = 8% + 5%.
Cost of Capital
LOS f, h
Sections 3.1.1, 3.3.3
71
A company’s data are provided in the following table:
Cost of debt
10%
Cost of equity
16%
Debt-to-equity ratio (D/E)
50%
Tax rate
30%
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
46
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
The weighted average cost of capital (WACC) is closest
to:
A
14.0%.
B
11.5%.
C
13.0%.
C is correct. Convert the D/E to determine the weights of debt and equity as follows:
w
d
=
+
=
+
=
D E
D E
1
50
1
50
33 3
%
%
. %
w
e
= 1 – w
d
= 66.7%
WACC = w
d
r
d
(1 – t
) + w
p
r
p
+ w
e
r
e
= 33.3% × 10% × (1 – 30%) + 66.7% × 16% = 13.0%
A is incorrect because the debt is not tax adjusted when determining the WACC.
WACC = 33.3% × 10% + 66.7% × 16% = 14.0%
B is incorrect because the D/E is used as the weight for debt and equity.
WACC = 50% × 10% × (1 – 30%) + 50% × 16% = 11.5%
Cost of Capital
LOS a, b
Sections 2, 2.1, 2.2
72
A company is considering a switch from an all-equity capital structure to a structure with equal amounts of equity and debt without increasing assets. This change will reduce the net income by 30%. If the current return on equity (ROE) is 10%, the ROE under the proposed capital structure will be closest
to:
A
6%.
B
20%.
C
14%.
C is correct.
All Equity
Half Equity and Debt
Net income
Net income × (1 – 30%)
Equity = 100% × Assets
Equity = 50% × Assets
ROE: = Net income/equity = Net income/(100% × Assets) = Net income/Assets = 10%
ROE: = [Net income × (1 – 30%)]/Equity = [Net income × (1 - 30%)]/(50% × Assets) = (Net income/Assets) × [(1 – 30%)/50%] = 10% × 1.4 = 14%
Alternatively, looking at the effects of the changes in sequence:
When equity decreases by half, ROE would become 10%/0.50 = 20%.
When net income decreases by 30%, the adjusted ROE would become = 20% × (1 – 0.30) = 14%.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
47
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
A is incorrect because it uses (Net Income × 30%) instead of (Net Income × [1 – 30%]) in the solution. (Net Income/Assets) × (30%/50%) = 10% × 0.6 = 6%.
B is incorrect because it does not adjust net income in the solution.
(Net Income/Assets)/50% = 20%
Measures of Leverage
LOS c
Section 3.4
73
The following information is available for a firm in a developing country:
Risk-free rate
2.0%
Firm’s equity beta
1.5
Equity risk premium in a developed country
3.0%
Developing country risk premium
4.0%
Sovereign yield spread
2.5%
The firm’s cost of equity using the CAPM approach is closest
to:
A
10.5%.
B
12.5%.
C
10.3%.
B is correct. Cost of equity = Risk-free rate + Equity beta × (Equity risk premium + Country risk premium) = 0.02 + 1.5 × (0.03 + 0.04) = 12.5%.
C is incorrect. Uses sovereign yield spread instead of equity premium. 0.02 + 1.5 × (0.03 + 0.025) = 10.25%.
A is incorrect. The developing country risk premium is added: 0.02 + 1.5(0.03) + 0.04 = 10.5
Or (0.03 + 0.04) × 1.5, ignoring the risk free rate
Cost of Capital
LOS j, h
Section 4.2 and 3.3
74
A company extends its trade credit terms by four days to all its credit custom-
ers. These credit customers are most likely to experience a four-day:
A
decrease in their net operating cycle.
B
increase in their operating cycle.
C
decrease in their operating cycle.
A is correct. The company’s customers are receiving a four-day increase in their number of days of payables, which will reduce the company’s cash conversion cycle (net oper-
ating cycle) by four days.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
48
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
B is incorrect because a four-day increase in the number of days of payables will not affect the operating cycle (DHO + DSO) but will reduce the net operating cycle by four days
C is incorrect because a four-day increase in the number of days of payables will not affect the operating cycle (DHO + DSO) but will reduce the net operating cycle by four days.
Financial Analysis Techniques
Section 4.2-4.3
LOS b
Working Capital Management
LOS c
Section 2.2
75
Which of the following statements describes the most
appropriate treatment of cash flows in capital budgeting?
A
Interest costs are included in the project’s cash flows to reflect financing costs.
B
A project is evaluated using its incremental cash flows on an after-tax basis.
C
Sunk costs and externalities should not be included in the cash flow estimates.
B is correct. All of the incremental cash flows arising from a project should be analyzed on an after-tax basis.
C is incorrect. Only sunk costs should be ignored in a project’s cash flow estimation, but not any externalities. Sunk costs cannot be recovered once they have been incurred. Externalities (both positive and negative ones) are the effects of an investment decision on other things beside the investment itself; they should therefore be included in the cash flow estimation.
A is incorrect. Financing costs like interest costs are excluded from calculations of operating cash flows. The financing costs are reflected in the required rate of return for an investment project. If financing costs are included, we would be double-counting these costs.
Capital Budgeting
LOS b
Section 3
76
Based on a need to borrow $2 million for one month, which of the following alternatives has the least expensive effective annual cost?
A
A credit line at 6.0% annually with a $4,000 annual commitment fee
B
A banker’s acceptance with an all-inclusive annual rate of 6.1%
C
Commercial paper at 5.9% annually with a dealer’s annual commission of $3,000 and a backup line annual cost of $4,000
B is correct.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
49
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
Method
Formula
Calculation
Banker’s Acceptance (BA)
Interest
Net proceeds
×
12
Interest: 0.061/12 × $2,000,000 = 10,167 Net proceeds: 2,000,000 – 10,167 = 1,989,833 BA cost (10,167 × 12)/1,989,833 = 0.0613
Line of credit (LOC)
Interest
Commitment fee
Usable loan amount
+
×
12
Interest: 0.06/12 × $2,000,000 = 10,000 Commitment fee: $4,000/12 = 333 Usable loan: $2,000,000 LOC cost (10,333 × 12)/2,000,000 = 0.0620
Commercial Paper (CP)
Interest
Dealer's commissions
Backup costs
Net proceeds
+
+
×
12
Interest: 0.059/12 × $2,000,000 = 9,833 Dealer commission: $3,000/12 = 250 Backup costs: $4,000/12 = 333 Total costs: 9,833 + 250 + 333 = 10,416 Net proceeds: 2,000,000 – 9,833 = 1,990,167 CP cost: (10,416 × 12)/1,990,167 = 0.0628
Banker’s acceptance has the lowest annual effective cost of 0.0613.
A is incorrect because the line of credit effective annual cost is 6.20%.
C is incorrect because the commercial paper effective annual cost is 6.28%.
Working Capital Management
LOS g
Section 8.4
77
Which of the following best
allows a board of directors to act in the interest of the company and shareholders?
A
Independent board members are selected from outside the industry.
B
Internal directors provide monitoring of the firm’s management.
C
The board has the authority to select and terminate senior management.
C is correct. The board has a duty to make decisions in the best interest of the company and shareholders. It reviews management’s performance in executing the strategy set by the board. In order to ensure strong execution of the strategy, the board must have the authority to select and terminate senior management.
A is incorrect. At least some independent members should have industry expertise.
B is incorrect. External directors should provide monitoring within the firm.
Corporate Governance and ESG: An Introduction
LOS f
Section 5.2
78
A project has the following cash flows ($) where the cash inflows are earned evenly throughout the year:
Year 0
Year 1
Year 2
Year 3
Year 4
–1,525
215
345
475
1,215
Assuming a discount rate of 11% annually, the discounted payback period (in years) is closest to:
A
3.4.
B
3.9.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
50
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
C
4.0.
B is correct. The discounted cash flows (CF) and their cumulative sum are:
Year
Discounted CF
Cumulative Discounted CF
Cumulative Cash Inflows
0
–1,525.00
–1,525.00
1
193.69 = 215/(1.11)
1
–1,331.31
193.69
2
280.01 = 345/(1.11)
2
–1,051.30
473.70
3
347.32 = 475/(1.11)
3
–703.98
821.02
4
800.36 = 1,215/(1.11)
4
96.38
1,621.38
After three years, $821.02 of the $1,525 investment is recovered leaving, $703.98 left to recover in the fourth year. Proportionately, only 0.88 (= $703.98/$800.36) of the cash flow in the fourth year is necessary to recover all of the investment, which makes the discounted payback equal to 3.9 years (rounded up from 3.88).
A is incorrect. This is the calculation with the payback period, which is not discounted.
C is incorrect. Based on the above calculation, the discounted payback to 3.88 years, the nearest round off value should be 3.9.
Capital Budgeting
LOS d
Section 4.4
79
The execution step of the portfolio management process includes:
A
preparing the investment policy statement.
B
finalizing the asset allocation.
C
monitoring the portfolio performance.
B is correct. Asset allocation occurs in the execution step.
A is incorrect. Preparation of the investment policy statement occurs in the planning step.
C is incorrect. Portfolio monitoring occurs in the feedback step.
Portfolio Management: An Overview
LOS d
Section 4
80
An investor with $10,000 decides to borrow an additional $5,000 at the risk- free rate and invest all the available funds in the market portfolio. This investor’s portfolio beta is closest
to:
A
0.5.
B
1.0.
C
1.5.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
51
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
C is correct. The weight in the market portfolio is 15,000/10,000 = 1.5 and the weight in the risk-free asset is –5,000/10,000 = –0.5. Because the beta of the risk-free asset is 0 and the market portfolio’s beta is 1, the portfolio’s beta is β
p
= 0(–0.5) + 1(1.5) = 1.5.
A is incorrect because it is computed using weights of 0.5 for the risk-free asset and the market portfolio, that is: 0(0.5) + 1(0.5) = 0.5.
B is incorrect because it is the market portfolio’s beta.
Portfolio Risk and Return: Part II
LOS b, e
Sections 2.2 and 4.2
81
The variance of returns of a security and the market portfolio are 0.25 and 0.09, respectively. If the covariance of security returns and market returns is 0.06, the security’s beta is closest
to:
A
0.24.
B
0.67.
C
0.40.
B is correct. The security's beta is:
β
σ
i
i
m
m
R R
=
(
)
=
=
Cov
,
.
.
.
2
0 06
0 09
0 67
A is incorrect because it is computed as (0.06/0.25) = 0.24.
C is incorrect because it is computed as the correlation between the returns on the security and the market portfolio as [0.06/(0.5 × 0.3)] = 0.4.
Portfolio Risk and Return: Part II
LOS e
Section 3.2
82
Risk management is most likely the process by which an organization:
A
minimizes its exposure to potential losses.
B
adjusts its risk to a predetermined level.
C
maximizes its risk-adjusted return.
B is correct. An organization with a strong competitive position can recover from losses more easily than one with a weaker competitive position. Therefore, an organization’s risk tolerance should reflect its competitive position. An organization’s size does not define the risk sources it faces or the relative losses it can absorb, so it should not be reflected in its risk tolerance. Neither the risk sources affecting an organization nor the size of the losses an organization can absorb are a function of its perception of market stability.
A is incorrect because a minimum risk position may not be optimal for the organization.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
52
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
C is incorrect because a high risk-adjusted return may require a level of risk taking that is beyond the organization’s capacity to absorb.
Risk Management: An Introduction
LOS a
Section 3.2
83
A good risk governance process would most likely
:
A
provide guidance on the size of the largest acceptable loss for the organization.
B
provide different risk targets for each unit within the organization.
C
be a bottom-up process that reflects the current risk exposures of all parts of the organization.
A is correct. A quality risk governance process takes a top-down approach and is charged with risk oversight for the entire organization. It should operate on an enterprise-wise basis rather than viewing each unit in isolation. It will determine the organization’s risk tolerance and provide a sense of the maximum loss the organization can absorb.
B is incorrect because a good risk governance process looks at the enterprise as a whole rather than viewing individual units in isolation.
C is incorrect because a risk governance process is a top-down process.
Risk Management: An Introduction
LOS c
Section 3
84
Which of the following is most likely
associated with an investor’s ability to take risk rather than the investor’s willingness to take risk?
A
The investor has a long investment time horizon.
B
The investor believes earning excess returns on stocks is a matter of luck.
C
Safety of principal is very important to the investor.
A is correct. Investment time horizon is an objective factor that measures the investor’s ability to take risk.
B is incorrect because luck is a subjective factor that measures willingness to take risk.
C is incorrect because safety of principal is a subjective factor that measures willing-
ness to take risk.
Basics of Portfolio Planning and Construction
LOS d
Section 2.2.1
85
Which of the following portfolios of risky assets is most likely
the global minimum-variance portfolio?
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
53
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
Portfolio
Expected Return
Standard Deviation
A
5%
20%
B
8%
33%
C
3%
20%
A
Portfolio C
B
Portfolio A
C
Portfolio B
B is correct. The global minimum-variance portfolio is the left-most point on the minimum- variance frontier among all portfolios of risky assets. Portfolios A and C have the same standard deviation, but Portfolio A dominates Portfolio C because of a higher return.
A is incorrect because it has a lower expected return while having the same variance as portfolio A. It is unlikely to be located on the minimum-variance frontier.
C is incorrect because it has a higher variance than portfolio A.
Portfolio Risk and Return: Part I
LOS f
Section 5.2
86
An analyst observes that stock markets usually demonstrate return distributions concentrated to the right with a higher frequency of negative deviation from the mean. This feature is most likely
known as:
A
positive skewness.
B
negative skewness.
C
kurtosis.
B is correct. The negatively skewed investment characteristic is usually related to the stock returns whose distribution is concentrated to the right.
A is incorrect positive skew has more large positive deviation from the mean.
C is incorrect because kurtosis is related to the fat-tail feature.
Portfolio Risk and Return: Part I
LOS b
Section 2.5
87
Returns from a depository receipt are least likely
affected by which of the fol-
lowing factors?
A
Exchange rate movements
B
Number of depository receipts
C
Analysts’ recommendations
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
54
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
B is correct. The price of each depository receipt (and, in turn, returns) will be affected by factors that affect the price of the underlying shares—such as company fundamentals, market conditions, analysts’ recommendations, and exchange rate movements. The number of depository receipts issued affects their price but does not affect the returns.
A is incorrect. The price of each depository receipt (and, in turn, returns) will be affected by such factors as company fundamentals, market conditions, analysts’ recommendations, and exchange rate movements.
C is incorrect. The price of each depository receipt (and, in turn, returns) will be affected by such factors as company fundamentals, market conditions, analysts’ recommendations, and exchange rate movements.
Overview of Equity Securities
LOS d, e
Section 5.2
88
Which of the following is most likely
one of the main functions of the financial system?
A
Determining an equilibrium interest rate
B
Ensuring that markets are informationally efficient
C
Ensuring that all investment projects receive sufficient funding
A is correct. One of the main functions of the financial system is to determine the equi-
librium interest rate, which is the only interest rate that would exist if all securities were equally risky, had equal terms, and were equally liquid.
B is incorrect. Informational market efficiency is not a key function of the financial system, rather that of regulatory framework
C is incorrect. The financial system provides sufficient funding only to the most pro-
ductive projects. An important function of the financial system is to direct resources away from wealth-diminishing projects.
Market Organization and Structure
LOS a
Section 2.2
89
A portfolio manager analyzes a market and discovers that it is not possible to achieve consistent and superior risk-adjusted returns, net of all expenses. This market is most likely
characterized by:
A
persistent anomalies.
B
informational efficiency.
C
restrictions on short selling.
B is correct. In an informationally efficient market, consistent and superior risk-adjusted returns (net of all expenses) are not achievable.
A is incorrect. In an informationally efficient market, consistent and superior risk- adjusted returns (net of all expenses) are not achievable. In such a situation, persistent anomalies are unlikely.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
55
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
C is incorrect. Some market experts argue that restrictions on short selling limit arbitrage trading, which impedes market efficiency.
Market Efficiency
LOS a
Section 2.1
90
The financial systems that are operationally efficient are most likely
character-
ized by:
A
security prices that reflect fundamental values.
B
liquid markets with low commissions and order price impacts.
C
the use of resources where they are most valuable.
B is correct. Operationally efficient markets are liquid markets in which the costs of arranging trades, commissions, bid–ask spreads, and order price impacts are low.
A is incorrect. Informationally efficient markets, not the operationally efficient markets, are characterized by prices that reflect fundamental values so that prices vary primarily in response to changes in fundamental values and not to demands for liquidity made by uninformed traders.
C is incorrect. Allocationally efficient markets, not the operationally efficient markets, are characterized by using resources where they are most valuable.
Market Organization and Structure
LOS k
Section 9
91
According to the industry life-cycle model, an industry in the shakeout stage is best
characterized as experiencing:
A
little or no growth and industry consolidation.
B
slowing growth and intense competition.
C
relatively high barriers to entry and periodic price wars.
B is correct. The shakeout stage is usually characterized by slowing growth, intense compe-
tition, and declining profitability. During the shakeout stage, demand approaches market saturation levels because few new customers are left to enter the market. Competition is intense as growth becomes increasingly dependent on market share gains.
A is incorrect. Little or no growth and industry consolidation are characteristics of an industry in mature phase.
C is incorrect. Relatively high barriers to entry and periodic price wars are character-
istic of mature phase.
Introduction to Industry and Company Analysis
LOS h
Section 5.1.5
92
In the semi-strong-form of market efficiency, fundamental analysis most likely
requires the analyst to:
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
56
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
A
extrapolate historical data to estimate future values and make investment decisions.
B
use trading rules for detecting the price movements that lead to new equi-
librium prices.
C
do a superior job of estimating the relevant variables and predicting earn-
ings surprises.
C is correct. Fundamental analysis facilitates a semi-strong-form efficient market by disseminating value-relevant information. Fundamental analysis can be profitable in terms of generating abnormal returns if the analyst creates a comparative advantage with respect to this information. Such an advantage can be achieved by doing a superior job of estimating the relevant variables and predicting earnings surprises.
A is incorrect. Simply extrapolating historical data may not produce superior returns in an efficient market.
B is incorrect. The use of technical rules for detecting the price movements and gradual price adjustments comprises technical analysis, not fundamental analysis.
Market Efficiency
LOS d
Section 3.4.1
93
A price-weighted index series is composed of the following three stocks:
Price before Split
Price after Split
Stock
End of Day 1
End of Day 2
X
$10
$12
Y
$20
$19
Z
$60
$22
If stock Z completes a three-for-one split at the end of Day 1, the value of the index after the split (at the end of Day 2) is closest
to:
A
31.7.
B
32.3.
C
29.9.
A is correct. The value of the price-weighted index is determined by dividing the sum of the security values by the divisor, which is typically set at inception to equal the initial number of securities in the index. In the case of a stock split, the index provider must adjust the value of the divisor by dividing the sum of the constituent prices after the split
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
57
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
by the value of the index before the split. This adjustment results in a new divisor that keeps the index value at the same level as before the split. The new divisor will then be used to calculate the index value after the split.
Index before the split = 10
20
60
3
+
+
= 30
New divisor, X
: 30 = 10
20
20
+
+
X
X
= 1.67
Index after the split = 12
19
22
1 67
+
+
.
= 31.7
B is incorrect. It calculates the changes in prices and uses it to derive the new index.
C is incorrect. It uses price after split to calculate the new divisor.
Security Market Indexes
LOS b, e
Section 3.2.1
94
A firm reports negative earnings for the year just ended. The price multiple of the firm’s stock that is least likely
to be meaningful is:
A
trailing price to earnings.
B
price to cash flow.
C
leading price to earnings.
A is correct. Negative earnings in the last year result in a negative ratio of trailing price to earnings and are not meaningful. Practitioners may use the ratio of (1) current price to cash flow or (2) leading price to earnings by replacing last year’s loss with forecasted earnings.
B is incorrect. Alternative to negative trailing price- to-earnings ratio, practitioners may use price-to-cash-flow ratio because it is possible cash flow would be positive in spite of a small loss.
C is incorrect. Alternative to negative trailing price-to-earnings ratio, practitioners may use leading price-to-earnings ratio by replacing last year’s loss with forecasted earnings which may be positive.
Equity Valuation: Concepts and Basic Tools
LOS j
Section 5
95
Which of the following types of companies is most
sensitive to economic conditions?
A
Cyclical
B
Growth
C
Defensive
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
58
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
A is correct. The performance of companies with cyclical demand for their products is highly variable and depends on economic conditions.
B is incorrect. Growth firms have steady increases in demand and are less dependent on economic conditions.
C is incorrect. Defensive demand is stable and does not fluctuate with the economic cycle, except in severe recessions.
Introduction to Industry and Company Analysis
LOS c
Section 5.1.7
96
Which of the following is the most
appropriate reason for using a free cash flow to equity (FCFE) model to value equity of a company?
A
FCFE models provide more accurate valuations than the dividend discount model.
B
A firm’s borrowing activities could influence dividend decisions, but they would not affect FCFE.
C
FCFE is a measure of the firm’s dividend paying capacity.
C is correct. FCFE is a measure of the firm’s dividend-paying capacity.
A is incorrect. The statement that FCFE models provide more accurate valuations than the dividend discount models is not necessarily true. The appropriateness and the effectiveness of a model depend on the firm characteristics and the analyst’s ability in making predictions.
B is incorrect. A firm’s borrowing activities do impact FCFE, as in the expression:
FCFE = CFO – FCInv + Net borrowing.
Equity Valuation: Concepts and Basic Tools
LOS e
Section 4
97
An index provider launches a new index that will include value stocks in a spe-
cific country. This index will most likely
be a:
A
large-capitalization index.
B
style index.
C
fundamentally weighted index.
B is correct. Style indexes represent a group of securities classified according to market capitalization, value, and growth or a combination of these characteristics. Therefore, the new index will most likely be a style index with a value classification.
A is incorrect. Large-capitalization indexes represent and track the largest securities in terms of market capitalization. They do not represent the category of value stocks.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
59
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
C is incorrect. Fundamentally weighted indexes use measures such as book value, cash flow, revenues, earnings, dividends, and number of employees to weight the con-
stituent securities. Securities of different styles and sectors could be included in the same fundamentally weighted index. Therefore, fundamentally weighted indexes do not represent the category of value stocks.
Security Market Indexes
LOS h
Section 5.4
98
Given the following information for a company:
●
●
Market value per share $250
●
●
Current dividend per share $5
●
●
Dividend growth rate 4%
●
●
Required rate of return 6%
and using the Gordon growth model to estimate the intrinsic value, a share of the company is best
described as being:
A
fairly valued.
B
overvalued.
C
undervalued.
C is correct. The intrinsic value of an equity security based on the Gordon growth model is estimated as follows:
V
D
g
r
g
D
r
g
0
0
1
1
=
+
(
)
-
=
-
where:
V
0
= the estimate of the intrinsic value
D
0
= the current dividend ($5) and D
1
is the next year’s dividend
g
= the dividend growth rate (4%)
r
= the required rate of return (6%)
The estimate of the intrinsic value is:
V
D
g
r
g
0
0
1
5 1
0 04
0 06
0 04
260
=
+
(
)
-
=
+
(
)
-
(
)
=
$
.
.
.
$
per share
Given that the market value ($250) is lower than the estimate of the intrinsic value ($260), a share of the company appears to be undervalued.
B is incorrect. The estimate of the intrinsic value is
V
D
g
r
g
0
0
1
5 1
0 04
0 06
0 04
260
=
+
(
)
-
=
+
(
)
-
(
)
=
$
.
.
.
$
per share
Given that the market value is lower than the estimate of the intrinsic value ($250 < $260), a share of the company appears to be undervalued, not overvalued. A share of a company is overvalued when the market value is higher than the intrinsic value.
A is incorrect. The estimate of the intrinsic value is
V
D
g
r
g
0
0
1
5 1
0 04
0 06
0 04
260
=
+
(
)
-
=
+
(
)
-
(
)
=
$
.
.
.
$
per share
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
60
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
Given that the market value is lower than the estimate of the intrinsic value ($250 < $260), a share of the company appears to be undervalued. A share of a company is fairly valued when the intrinsic value is equal to the market value. Using $5 as D
1
, rather than D
0
, would lead to the wrong conclusion that a share of the company is fairly valued:
$5/(0.06 – 0.04) = $250 per share
Equity Valuation: Concepts and Basic Tools
LOS g
Section 4.2
Market Efficiency
LOS b
Section 2.2
99
What type of risk most likely
affects an investor’s ability to buy and sell bonds in the desired amounts and at the desired time?
A
Market liquidity
B
Spread
C
Default
A is correct. The size of the spread between the bid price and the ask price is the primary measure of market liquidity of the issue. Market liquidity risk is the risk that the investor will have to sell a bond below its indicated value. The wider the bid–ask spread, the greater the market liquidity risk.
B is incorrect because spread risk is the risk that spreads widen.
C is incorrect because default risk is the risk the borrower defaults.
Fundamentals of Credit Analysis
LOS a
Section 2
100
Which of the following most likely
exhibits negative convexity?
A
A callable bond
B
An option-free bond
C
A putable bond
A is correct. A callable bond exhibits negative convexity at low yield levels and positive convexity at high yield levels.
B is incorrect because an option-free bond always exhibits positive convexity.
C is incorrect because a putable bond always exhibits positive convexity, higher than an option-free bond.
Understanding Fixed-Income Risk and Return
LOS h
Section 3.6
101
If a bank wants the ability to retire debt prior to maturity in order to take advantage of lower borrowing rates, it most likely
issues a:
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
61
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
A
convertible bond.
B
callable bond.
C
putable bond.
B is correct. Callable bonds give issuers the ability to retire debt prior to maturity. The most compelling reason for them to do so is to take advantage of lower borrowing rates.
A is incorrect because convertible bonds give bondholders the ability to convert the bond to a predetermined number of shares of the company.
C is incorrect because putable bonds give bondholders the ability to sell the bond at predetermined price to issuers.
Fixed-Income Markets: Issuance, Trading, and Funding
LOS g
Section 6.3.5
102
An investor purchases a 5% coupon bond maturing in 15 years for par value. Immediately after purchase, the yield required by the market increases. The investor would then most likely
have to sell the bond at:
A
a premium.
B
a discount.
C
par.
B is correct. The bond would sell below par or at a discount if the yield required by the market rises above the coupon rate. Because the bond initially was purchased at par, the coupon rate equals the yield required by the market. Subsequently, if yields rise above the coupon, the bond’s market price would fall below par.
A is incorrect because the yield is now greater than the coupon.
C is incorrect because the yield is now greater than the coupon.
Introduction to Fixed-Income Valuation
LOS b
Section 2.3
103
The process of securitization is least likely
to allow banks to:
A
originate loans.
B
reduce the layers between borrowers and ultimate investors.
C
repackage loans into simpler structures.
C is correct. Securitization allows banks to originate (or create) loans, and the process results in a reduction in the layers between borrowers and ultimate investors. The loans are repackaged into more complex, not simpler, structures.
A is incorrect because securitization allows banks to originate (or create) loans.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
62
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
B is incorrect because securitization results in a reduction in the layers between borrowers and ultimate investors.
Introduction to Asset-Backed Securities
LOS a
Section 2
104
Which of the following is least likely
a component of yield spread?
A
Taxation
B
Expected inflation rate
C
Credit risk
B is correct. Building blocks of the yield curve are spread (risk premium) and a benchmark (risk-free rate of return). Expected inflation rate and expected real rate are components of the risk-free rate of return (i.e., the benchmark).
A is incorrect because taxation is part of the yield spread providing the investor with compensation for the tax impact of holding a specific bond.
C is incorrect because credit risk is part of the yield spread providing the investor with compensation for the credit risks of holding a specific bond.
Introduction to Fixed-Income Valuation
LOS i
Section 5.1
105
A 90-day commercial paper issue is quoted at a discount rate of 4.75% for a 360-day year. The bond equivalent yield for this instrument is closest
to:
A
4.87%.
B
4.81%.
C
4.75%.
A is correct. The price of the commercial paper per 100 of par value is
PV
FV
DR
=
×
-
×
1
Days
Year
where PV
and FV
are the price and face value of the money market instrument, Days is the number of days between settlement and maturity, Year is number of days in the year, and DR
is the discount rate stated as an annual percentage.
PV
=
×
-
×
=
100
1
90
360
0 0475
98 8125
.
.
The bond equivalent yield is
AOR
FV
PV
PV
=
×
-
=
×
-
=
Year
Days
365
90
100
98 8125
98 8125
.
.
4 874
.
%
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
63
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
B is incorrect because the price of the commercial paper is incorrectly computed as
PV
=
×
-
×
=
100
1
90
365
0 0475
98 8288
.
.
The bond equivalent yield is computed as
AOR
FV
PV
PV
=
×
-
=
×
-
=
Year
Days
365
90
100
98 8288
98 8288
.
.
4 806
.
%
C is incorrect because it is just the discount rate itself.
Introduction to Fixed-Income Valuation
LOS f
Section 3.5
106
The factor least likely
to influence the yield spread on an option-free, fixed-rate bond is a change in the:
A
credit risk of the issuer.
B
expected inflation rate.
C
liquidity of the bond.
B is correct. For an option-free, fixed-rate bond, changes in the yield spread can arise from changes in the credit risk of the issuer and/or changes in the liquidity of the issue. Changes in the expected inflation rate influence the benchmark rate.
C is incorrect because changes in the yield spread an option-free, fixed-rate bond arise from changes in the liquidity of the issue.
A is incorrect because changes in the yield spread an option-free, fixed-rate bond arise from changes in the credit risk of the issuer.
Understanding Fixed-Income Risk and Return
LOS l
Section 5
107
Samsung Electronics Co has issued a five-year bond with a par value of $1,000 and a coupon rate of 6.5%. This bond is most likely
to be classified as a:
A
capital market security.
B
surety bond.
C
consol.
A is correct. Fixed-income securities with original maturities that are longer than one year are called capital market securities. The bond mentioned in the question has a five-year maturity and therefore is a capital market security.
B is incorrect because a surety bond is a bond that reimburses investors for any losses incurred if the issuer defaults.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
64
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
C is incorrect because a consol has no stated maturity date.
Fixed-Income Securities: Defining Elements
LOS a
Section 2.1.2
108
In a mortgage pass-through security, the pass-through rate:
A
is adjusted as market rates rise or fall.
B
adjusts the rate on the underlying pool of mortgages by a servicing fee.
C
is equal to the mortgage rate on the underlying pool of mortgages.
B is correct. In a mortgage pass-through security, the pass-through rate is less than the mortgage rate on the underlying pool of mortgages by an amount equal to the servicing (and other administrative) fees.
A is incorrect because in a mortgage pass-through security, the pass-through rate is less than the mortgage rate on the underlying pool of mortgages by an amount equal to the servicing (and other administrative) fees.
C is incorrect because in a mortgage pass-through security, the pass-through rate is less than the mortgage rate on the underlying pool of mortgages by an amount equal to the servicing (and other administrative) fees.
Introduction to Asset-Backed Securities
LOS e
Section 5.1.1
109
Which of the following is most likely
an example of a Eurobond?
A
A Canadian borrower issuing British pound–denominated bonds in the UK market.
B
A Japanese borrower issuing US dollar–denominated bonds in the US market.
C
An Australian borrower issuing Canadian dollar–denominated bonds in the UK market.
C is correct. A Eurobond is an international bond issued outside the jurisdiction of any one country and not denominated in the currency of the country where it is issued.
A is incorrect because this is an example of a foreign bond, which is a bond issued by an entity incorporated in a country other than where the bond is issued and in whose currency the bond is denominated.
B is incorrect because this is an example of a foreign bond, which is a bond issued by an entity incorporated in a country other than where the bond is issued and in whose currency the bond is denominated.
Fixed-Income Securities: Defining Elements
LOS d
Section 3.2
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
65
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
110
A bond is currently selling for 102.31. A valuation model estimates the price will fall to 101.12 if interest rates increase by 20 bps and rise to 103.74 if interest rates decrease by 20 bps. Using these estimates, the effective duration of the bond is closest to:
A
6.48.
B
6.40.
C
6.31.
B is correct. The effective duration of a bond is
EffDur = PV
PV
PV
-
+
(
)
-
(
)
×
(
)
×
(
)
2
0
Δ
Curve
where PV
–
, PV
0
, and PV
+
are the values of the bond when the yield falls, under the current yield, and when the yield rises, respectively, and ΔCurve is the change in the benchmark yield curve.
EffDur = 103 74
101 12
2
102 31
0 002
6 40
.
.
.
.
.
-
×
×
=
A is incorrect because it has 101.12 in the denominator instead of 102.31: 103 74
101 12
2
101 12
0 002
6 48
.
.
.
.
.
-
×
×
=
C is incorrect because it has 103.74 in the denominator instead of 102.31: 103 74
101 12
2
103 74
0 002
6 31
.
.
.
.
.
-
×
×
=
Understanding Fixed-Income Risk and Return
LOS b
Section 3.2
111
Which of the following derivatives is least likely
to be classified as a contingent claim?
A
A futures contract
B
A call option contract
C
A credit default swap
A is correct. A futures contract is classified as a forward commitment in which the buyer undertakes to purchase the underlying asset from the seller at a later date and at a price agreed on by the two parties when the contract is initiated.
B is incorrect. A call option contract is a contingent claim in which the buyer of the option has a right to purchase the underlying asset at a fixed price on or before a pre- specified expiration date.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
66
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
C is incorrect. A credit default swap is a contingent claim in which the credit protec-
tion seller provides protection to the credit protection buyer against the credit risk of a third party.
Derivative Markets and Instruments
LOS b
Section 4.1.2
112
Forward rate agreements are most likely
used to hedge an exposure in the:
A
foreign exchange market.
B
money market.
C
equity market.
B is correct. Forward rate agreements are used to hedge interest rate exposure present in the money market.
A is incorrect. Forward rate agreements are used to hedge interest rate exposure and not foreign exchange exposure.
C is incorrect. Forward rate agreements are used to hedge interest rate exposure and not equity exposure.
Basics of Derivative Pricing and Valuation
LOS e
Section 3.1.4
113
An investor notices that the price of an American call option is above the price of a European call option with otherwise identical features. What is the most likely
reason for this difference?
A
The options are close to expiration.
B
The options are deep in the money.
C
The underlying will go ex-dividend.
C is correct. American call prices can differ from European call prices only if there are cash flows on the underlying.
A is incorrect. Early expiration of the option is not a reason for pricing differences between American and European call options. American call prices can differ from European call prices only if there are cash flows on the underlying.
B is incorrect. The fact that the option is deep in the money is not a reason for pricing differences between American and European call options. American call prices can differ from European call prices only if there are cash flows on the underlying.
Basics of Derivative Pricing and Valuation
LOS o
Section 4.3
114
If the exercise price of a European put option at expiration is below the price of the underlying, the value of the option is
most likely
:
A
equal to zero.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
67
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
B
less than zero.
C
greater than zero.
A is correct. If the exercise price of a European put option is below the underlying price at expiration, the option is worthless and has a value of zero.
B is incorrect. The value of an option can never be negative.
C is incorrect. For a positive value, exercise price must be below the price of underlying.
Basics of Derivative Pricing and Valuation
LOS i
Section 4.1.1
115
In efficient financial markets, risk-free arbitrage opportunities:
A
will not exist.
B
may persist in the long run.
C
may exist temporarily.
C is correct. In efficient financial markets, risk-free arbitrage opportunities may exist temporarily, but their continuous exploitation will eliminate these arbitrage opportu-
nities in the long run.
A is incorrect. Financial markets being efficient does not mean that risk-free arbitrage opportunities cannot exist.
B is incorrect. In efficient financial markets, any risk-free arbitrage opportunities will exist only temporarily because their continuous exploitation will result in these arbitrage opportunities being eliminated in the long run.
Derivative Markets and Instruments
LOS e
Section 7.2
116
Do management fees most likely
get paid to the manager of a hedge fund, regardless of the fund’s performance?
A
No, only when the fund’s net asset value exceeds the previous high-water mark
B
No, only when the fund’s gross return is positive
C
Yes
C is correct. Regardless of performance, the management fee is always paid to the fund manager.
B is incorrect because the gross return can be at any level and the manager is still paid the management fee.
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
68
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
A is incorrect because the management fee is paid regardless of the value of the assets in the fund.
Introduction to Alternative Investments
LOS f
Section 3.3.1
117
Investors in alternative assets who seek liquidity are most likely
to invest in:
A
hedge funds.
B
real estate investment trusts.
C
private equity.
B is correct. Real estate investment trusts are publicly traded and thus provide liquidity.
A is incorrect. Hedge funds may have long lockup periods.
C is incorrect. Private equity funds may have long lockup periods.
Introduction to Alternative Investments
LOS d
Section 8.1.1
118
The real estate valuation method that uses a discounted cash flow model is best
characterized as:
A
a comparable sales approach.
B
a cost approach.
C
an income approach.
C is correct. The income approach to real estate valuation values a property by using a discounted cash flow model.
A is incorrect. The comparable sales approach involves determining a value based on recent sales of similar properties.
B is incorrect. The cost approach evaluates the replacement cost of the property.
Introduction to Alternative Investments
LOS e
Section 5.4
119
Which of the following is least likely
to reduce the likelihood of being defrauded by a dishonest money manager?
A
Third-party custody of assets under management
B
Strong and consistent reported investment performance
C
Independent verification of investment results
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
69
2018 Level I Mock Exam (B) PM
B is correct. To prevent fraud, involvement of third parties in the reporting and asset management process is helpful. A strong and consistent reported investment perfor-
mance that lacks outside verification may actually be a warning sign.
A is incorrect. Third-party custody of assets under management helps to reduce the possibility of fraud.
C is incorrect. Independent verification of investment results helps to reduce the possibility of fraud.
Introduction to Alternative Investments
LOS g
Section 8.3
120
In valuing underlying hedge fund positions, the most conservative approach is most likely one that uses:
A
the average of the bid and ask prices.
B
bid prices for longs and ask prices for shorts.
C
the most recent market prices.
B is correct A conservative and theoretically accurate approach is to use bid prices for longs and ask prices for shorts because these are the prices at which the positions could be closed.
A is incorrect because although using the average quote [(bid + ask)/2] is a common approach, a more conservative and theoretically accurate approach is to use bid prices for longs and ask prices for shorts as these are the prices at which the positions could be closed.
C is incorrect because when market prices or quotes are used for valuation, funds may differ in which price or quote they use (for example, bid price, ask price, average quote, and median quote).
Introduction to Alternative Investments
LOS d
Section 3.4
Your preview ends here
Eager to read complete document? Join bartleby learn and gain access to the full version
- Access to all documents
- Unlimited textbook solutions
- 24/7 expert homework help
Related Documents
Related Questions
B ch01 (Fall 2021
w https://education.wiley.
B Present Value Tables (1.
Final Exam (Fall 2020)
- Final Exam (Fall 2020)
-/6
Question 24 of 50
View Policies
Current Attempt in Progress
Sheridan Manufacturing Company expects the following sales in January, February, and March:
Cash
Credit
Sales
Sales
$50900
$250500
January
February
$45900
$240500
March
$85000
$325000
The controller has determined that the company collects credit sales as follows: 60% in the month of sale, 30% in the first month
after sale, 5% in the second month after sale, and 5% is expected to be uncollectible. How much cash will be collected from
customers in March?
O $352150
O $364675
O $410000
O $279675
Save for Later
Attempts: 0 of 1 used
Submit Answer
MacBook Air
esc
888
FT
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
@
#
2$
4
&
*
6.
7
8.
Q
W
arrow_forward
17.39 .. 90
PROBLEMS OF SEMESTER FINAL TEST 2021
Word
es
Mailings
Review
View
Help
O Tell me what you want to do
Aa -
AaBbCeDd AaBbCcl AaBbCcDe AaBbCcDe AaBt
Heading 2 Heading 3
T Normal I No Spac. Headin
Paragraph
Styles
4.5.6 7 8.. 9. • 10. 11 12. 13. 14. 15.I
Thursday : January 21, 2021 --- 80 Minutes
1. In this section we examine three theories of investor preference: The dividend irrelevance
theory. The "bird in the hand" theory, the tax preference theory, which theory is the best?
What is the different of stock dividends, stock splits, and stock repurchase.
2. In the working capital management, we know about cash conversion cycle model. For
problem if average inventories are $3 million and sales are $11 million. If receivables are
S 657.535 and sales are S 11 million. Then, if its cost of goods sold are $9 million per year
and if its accounts payable average $ 657.535. What is the length of the cash conversion
sicle?
3. The ELGRAJO Corporation has capital structure as follow…
arrow_forward
E 4 Quarter 3 SY 2021- 2022
B. A good decision is based on knowledge and not on numbers
of your answer on the space provided before each item.
WRITTEN WORK No. 4
1.On finding good strategies A. "Never discourage anyone who continually makes progress, no
Directions: Read each item carefully and identify what is asked or described. Write the letter
in Business Ethics 12, MODULE
Complete Name:
Year-Section:
Score:
Contact Number:
Messenger Account:
I. Matching Type :
Column A
Column B
matter how slow
2. On motivating a team
3.On ignoring the haters
C. Good actions give strength to ourselves and inspire good actions to
others"
4.On facing your fears
D. People are like dirt. They can either nourish and help you grow as a
person or they can stunt your growth and make you wilt and die."
E. Better a little which is done well than a great deal that is done
imperfectly.
F. As there are misanthropists or haters of men, so also are there
misologists or han ters of ideas
G. Courage is knowing what…
arrow_forward
mpsLk
THE T-ACCO
DRILL 1
006o or doles llid bovlooa y0 M 08
LESSON 4-3
Journalize the following transactions of Till A Lok Consultancy for the month
of January:
Fn
2018
upe
bem
Lesson Objective
Jan. 1
Mr. Lok deposited P 880,000 in the account of the company. He also invested a
computer valued at P67,000.
• analyze transactions with the use
Consultancy services rendered to Mongolia Corp. on account, P75,000
3
Bought P700,000 worth of transportation equipment from Mitsubishi on
account
wios
Consultancy services rendered to various clients for cash, P190,000
USE OF T-ACCOUNTS
7
15
Consultancy services rendered to Codak Co. on account, P32,000
An account is a form of record that
specific accounting value. The simplest
accounting equation resembles the capit
the effect of a transaction in the assets, E
16
Paid Mitsubishi Motors in full
nibnotebnU TUOY leeT
18
Collected P15,000 from Codak Co.
20
Received water bill, P980
4.000
26
Paid electricity for the month, P2,540
The three elements of…
arrow_forward
General Accounting I 2020-2021 Fall Term Final Exam (page 18 of 25)-Google Chrome
a.tr/mod/quiz/attempt.php?attempt=361811&cmid=180187&page=17
MSKÜ-LMS
1807 ŞB: 1 ÖRGÜN General Accounting I İktisadi ve Idari Bilimler Fakültesi İktisa
8
A credit sale of $3,600 is made on July 15, terms 2/10, n/30, on which a return of $200 is granted on July 18. What amount is received as payment in full on July 247
Tanmadi
O a. $3.332
izerinden
tlenmiş
O b. $3,600
oruyu
etle
OC $3.528
O d. $3,400
Önceki sayfa
arrow_forward
NTEGRATE
FABM1 21-22 WEEK 4 TASK
Learning Competency
• The learners shall be able to illustrate the accounting equation (ABM_FABM11-llb-c-8);
Perform operations involving simple cases with the use of the accounting equation (ABM_FABM11-Illb-c-9)
S.Y. 2021-2022
ARISTOTLE
PARMENIDES
EPICURUS
WEEK 4- LEARNING TASK 3 PAGE 21
Learning Task 3: The following transactions were made during the first month of a single
proprietor's business operation.
1. Mr. Y started a grocery store. He invested P 200,00 as initial investment.
2. He registered his business paying P 1,500 for registration.
3. He paid P 20,000 for store rent applicable for one year.
4. He incurred and paid P25,000 for the repair of the grocery store.
5. He purchased merchandise for sale amounting to P 300,000, paying P
200,000 with the balance to be paid after 60 days.
6. He paid P2,000 for the transportation of the merchandise purchased.
7. He hired a saleslady for a contract of P 5,000 per month salary.
8. He sold P100,000 worth…
arrow_forward
Cashaun Wo x
CCU
brightspace.wiltech.edu/d2l/le/7659/discussions/topics/2429/View
Subscribe
New Wave Images is a graphics design firm that prepares its financial statements using a calendar year.
Manny Kinn, the company treasurer and vice president of finance, has prepared a classified balance sheet
as of December 31. In January, this balance sheet will be submitted along with an application for a loan
from First Peoples Community Bank. An excerpt from the balance sheet follows:
Cash
$ 25,000
Accounts Receivable
85,000
Total Assets
$ 250,000
The accounts receivable balance includes a $56,000 loan to Tom Morrow, the company president. Tom
borrowed the money from New Wave 18 months earlier for a down payment on a new home. Tom has
orally assured Manny that he will pay off the loan within the next year. Because Tom is the company
president, Manny treats the amount due as a trade account receivable. In addition, Manny knows that the
bank will consider a large balance in trade accounts…
arrow_forward
A Final Exam - MATH 1330 - Math
b Details | bartleby
E New tab
A https://www.webassign.net/web/Student/Assignment-Responses/submit?dep=254878928tags=autosave#question4023958_1
Sign in
12.
DETAILS
HARMATHAP12 6.2.009.
MYΝΟΤΕS
What are the future value and the interest earned if $4000 is invested for 3 years at 8% compounded quarterly? (Round your answers to the nearest cent.)
future value
24
interest earned
%24
arrow_forward
10:04
Assignment Details
ATG-110-20A01: Financial Accounting (Session II Summer 2021)
7474 unread replies.7575 replies.
Please read and respond to TIF 12-2 on page 623. Review
the rubric to ensure you receive full points for this
discussion.
Discussion Rubric- 25 points(1)_(3).docx
*After you have posted your answers, please reply to three
other students' posts. This discussion board was set up so
that you will not be able to see others replies until you post
your own.
Search entries or author Filter replies by unreadUnread
Collapse replies
TIF 12-2
Issuing Stock
1.
ETHICS Lou Hoskins and Shirley Crothers are
organizing Red Lodge Metals Unlimited Inc. to
undertake a high-risk gold mining venture in Canada.
Lou and Shirley tentatively plan to request
authorization for 400,000,000 shares of common
stock to be sold to the general public. Lou and Shirley
have decided to establish par of $0.03 per share in
order to appeal to a wide variety of potential
investors. Lou and Shirley believe…
arrow_forward
How do i go about setting this up?
arrow_forward
ACCT2401Instructions for CompletingComprehensive ProblemThe comprehensive problem provides an illustration of the basic accounting cycle. Studentsmust complete the following items for the first month of operation (January) and the secondmonth of operations (February). Hint: Complete all items listed below (#1-#11) for Januaryprior to starting February.1. Record transactions with journal entries in the General Journal.2. Post journal entries to the General Ledger.3. Prepare the trial balance before adjustment (on the worksheet).4. Prepare the adjusting journal entries.5. Post the adjusting entries to the General Ledger.6. Prepare the adjusted trial balance (on the worksheet).7. Complete the worksheet.8. Prepare closing journal entries.9. Post the closing entries to the General Ledger.10. Prepare the post-closing trial balance.11. Prepare the following financial statements:
arrow_forward
V Content
Pearson (Assignments) - MA
Ô https://www.mathxl.com/Student/PlayerTest.aspx?testld%3D225147196
3 103 Spring 2021
st: Test 2 (Finance) Online
nis Question: 1 pt
5 of 19 (1 complete) ▼
How much must be deposited today into the following account in order to have a $135,000 college fund in 11 years? Assume no additional deposits are made.
An account with quarterly compounding and an APR of 7.32%
Sshould be deposited today.
(Do not round until the final answer. Then round to the nearest cent as needed.)
arrow_forward
about the homework of Intermediate Accounting: Reporting and Analysis 3rd Edition Chapter 6, Problem 17E
arrow_forward
Assignment 6.1: Session 6 Comprehensive Problem (Chapter 8)
Instructions
In this session, we have a 6-part comprehensive problem. Download the Session 6 Comprehensive Problem Templates below to complete the 6 required parts of the problem. You will need your Bergevin and MacQueen book for reference.
Rancho Cucamonga Inc. began business on January 1, 2020. The firm earned $100 from sales in its first year of business. Rancho Cucamonga collected $90 of revenue earned in cash during 2020 and reported a $10 account receivable on its 2020 balance sheet. The firm paid $70 cash for operating expenses in 2020 and reported a $5 account payable for unpaid operating expenses on its 2020 balance sheet. Income tax laws only recognize cash collected from sales and cash paid for expenses as taxable items in the year collected or paid.
Rancho Cucamonga also reported a $10 fine, paid in cash, to the federal government for unfair business practices. Generally accepted accounting principles allow firms…
arrow_forward
My Monroe
Z View Assessment
> Bb Collaborate - 20FL-LA122-18 x
M Daily Notifications - rblack8930 x
命
A https://elearn.monroecollege.edu/ultra/courses/ 40124 1/grades/assessment/_2440908 1/overview/attempt/
The following is Green Co.'s Pre-Closing Trial Balance as of December 31, 2017. Green's accounting period is a month,
the month of December 2017. (Note that the accounts are not
thus the balances in the temporary accounts are for
listed in their normal sequence -- rather they are listed in alphabetical sequence.)
Account Name
_Debit_
Credit_
Gradin
Accounts Payable
26,000
Accounts Receivable
28,850
Cash
10,000
Common Stock
12,500
Cost of Goods Sold
68,000
Equipment
73,000
150
Interest Expense
Interest Payable
500
Inventory
45,000
Note Payable
21,000
Retained Earnings
53,000
Sales Revenue
179,000
Supplies Expense
7,000
Wages Expense
60,000
Total
292,000
292,000
Place the accounts in the correct order.
Use the editor to formor your onswer
A Past due This attempt will be submitted…
arrow_forward
Spring 2021 Final Exam(2) Saved to this PC -
егences
Mailings
Review
View
Help
AaBbCcD AaBbCcDc AaBbC AaBbCcC A aB
三。
I Normal
T No Spac. Heading 1
Неading 2
Title
Paragraph
Styles
6-Dyson Manufacturing Company had the following financial statement results for last year. Net
sales were $1.2 million with net income of $90,000. Total assets at year-end amounted to
$900,000.
a. Calculate Dyson's asset turnover ratio and its profit margin.
b. What is Dyson's rate of return on assets.
7-Marriot Corporation has two bond issues outstanding, each with a par value of $1,000.
Information about each is listed below. Suppose market interest rates rise 2 percentage point
across the yield curve. What will be the change in price for each of the bonds? Does this tell us
anything about the relationship between coupon rate and interest rate risk?
Bond A: 10 years to maturity, 0 percent coupon, market interest rate is 10 percent.
Bond B: 10 years to maturity, 10 percent coupon, market interest rate is 10…
arrow_forward
Suppose a business receives a 907000 long term bank loan on December 31 2019 the borrowing arrangement requires the business to pay 226 750 by September 2020 show how the business will report both current and long term liabilities on its December 31 2019 balance sheet .
arrow_forward
Solve accounting questions
arrow_forward
View
History Bookmarks
Window Help
A education.wiley.com
1 ך
WP NWP Assessment Player UI Application
DAXMED WALI FURINL
Question 26 of 42
View Policies
Current Attempt in Progress
Which of the following is in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles?
Accrual-basis accounting
Cash-basis accounting
Both accrual-basis and cash-basis accounting
Neither accrual-basis nor cash-basis accounting
Save for Later
OO O O
arrow_forward
ACC 122 Fall 2020Comprehensive ProjectBestValue Corporation's Trial Balance at December 31, 20XX is presented below.All 20XX transactions have been recorded except for the items described on the next page.Debit CreditCash $ 109,890Accounts Receivable 28,789Inventory 25,540Debt Investments 0Land 55,674Buildings 215,850Equipment 75,120Allowance for Doubtful Accounts $ 1,027Accumulated Depreciation-Buildings 63,306Accumulated Depreciation-Equipment 16,048Accounts Payable 35,278Interest Payable 0Unearned Rent Revenue 48,900Dividends Payable 0Income Tax Payable 0Bonds Payable 0Discount on Bonds Payable 0Common Stock ($2 par) 29,200Paid in Capital in Excess of Par-Common Stock 44,580Preferred Stock ($60 par) 0Paid in Capital in Excess of Par-Preferred Stock 0Retained Earnings 107,904Treasury Stock 0Cash Dividends 0Sales Revenue 776,068Rent Revenue 0Gain on Sale of Land 0Bad Debt Expense 0Interest Expense 0Cost of Goods Sold 478,542Depreciation Expense 0Other Operating Expenses 53,274Salaries…
arrow_forward
SEE MORE QUESTIONS
Recommended textbooks for you

Cornerstones of Financial Accounting
Accounting
ISBN:9781337690881
Author:Jay Rich, Jeff Jones
Publisher:Cengage Learning
Principles of Accounting Volume 1
Accounting
ISBN:9781947172685
Author:OpenStax
Publisher:OpenStax College

Accounting Information Systems
Finance
ISBN:9781337552127
Author:Ulric J. Gelinas, Richard B. Dull, Patrick Wheeler, Mary Callahan Hill
Publisher:Cengage Learning
Related Questions
- B ch01 (Fall 2021 w https://education.wiley. B Present Value Tables (1. Final Exam (Fall 2020) - Final Exam (Fall 2020) -/6 Question 24 of 50 View Policies Current Attempt in Progress Sheridan Manufacturing Company expects the following sales in January, February, and March: Cash Credit Sales Sales $50900 $250500 January February $45900 $240500 March $85000 $325000 The controller has determined that the company collects credit sales as follows: 60% in the month of sale, 30% in the first month after sale, 5% in the second month after sale, and 5% is expected to be uncollectible. How much cash will be collected from customers in March? O $352150 O $364675 O $410000 O $279675 Save for Later Attempts: 0 of 1 used Submit Answer MacBook Air esc 888 FT F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 @ # 2$ 4 & * 6. 7 8. Q Warrow_forward17.39 .. 90 PROBLEMS OF SEMESTER FINAL TEST 2021 Word es Mailings Review View Help O Tell me what you want to do Aa - AaBbCeDd AaBbCcl AaBbCcDe AaBbCcDe AaBt Heading 2 Heading 3 T Normal I No Spac. Headin Paragraph Styles 4.5.6 7 8.. 9. • 10. 11 12. 13. 14. 15.I Thursday : January 21, 2021 --- 80 Minutes 1. In this section we examine three theories of investor preference: The dividend irrelevance theory. The "bird in the hand" theory, the tax preference theory, which theory is the best? What is the different of stock dividends, stock splits, and stock repurchase. 2. In the working capital management, we know about cash conversion cycle model. For problem if average inventories are $3 million and sales are $11 million. If receivables are S 657.535 and sales are S 11 million. Then, if its cost of goods sold are $9 million per year and if its accounts payable average $ 657.535. What is the length of the cash conversion sicle? 3. The ELGRAJO Corporation has capital structure as follow…arrow_forwardE 4 Quarter 3 SY 2021- 2022 B. A good decision is based on knowledge and not on numbers of your answer on the space provided before each item. WRITTEN WORK No. 4 1.On finding good strategies A. "Never discourage anyone who continually makes progress, no Directions: Read each item carefully and identify what is asked or described. Write the letter in Business Ethics 12, MODULE Complete Name: Year-Section: Score: Contact Number: Messenger Account: I. Matching Type : Column A Column B matter how slow 2. On motivating a team 3.On ignoring the haters C. Good actions give strength to ourselves and inspire good actions to others" 4.On facing your fears D. People are like dirt. They can either nourish and help you grow as a person or they can stunt your growth and make you wilt and die." E. Better a little which is done well than a great deal that is done imperfectly. F. As there are misanthropists or haters of men, so also are there misologists or han ters of ideas G. Courage is knowing what…arrow_forward
- mpsLk THE T-ACCO DRILL 1 006o or doles llid bovlooa y0 M 08 LESSON 4-3 Journalize the following transactions of Till A Lok Consultancy for the month of January: Fn 2018 upe bem Lesson Objective Jan. 1 Mr. Lok deposited P 880,000 in the account of the company. He also invested a computer valued at P67,000. • analyze transactions with the use Consultancy services rendered to Mongolia Corp. on account, P75,000 3 Bought P700,000 worth of transportation equipment from Mitsubishi on account wios Consultancy services rendered to various clients for cash, P190,000 USE OF T-ACCOUNTS 7 15 Consultancy services rendered to Codak Co. on account, P32,000 An account is a form of record that specific accounting value. The simplest accounting equation resembles the capit the effect of a transaction in the assets, E 16 Paid Mitsubishi Motors in full nibnotebnU TUOY leeT 18 Collected P15,000 from Codak Co. 20 Received water bill, P980 4.000 26 Paid electricity for the month, P2,540 The three elements of…arrow_forwardGeneral Accounting I 2020-2021 Fall Term Final Exam (page 18 of 25)-Google Chrome a.tr/mod/quiz/attempt.php?attempt=361811&cmid=180187&page=17 MSKÜ-LMS 1807 ŞB: 1 ÖRGÜN General Accounting I İktisadi ve Idari Bilimler Fakültesi İktisa 8 A credit sale of $3,600 is made on July 15, terms 2/10, n/30, on which a return of $200 is granted on July 18. What amount is received as payment in full on July 247 Tanmadi O a. $3.332 izerinden tlenmiş O b. $3,600 oruyu etle OC $3.528 O d. $3,400 Önceki sayfaarrow_forwardNTEGRATE FABM1 21-22 WEEK 4 TASK Learning Competency • The learners shall be able to illustrate the accounting equation (ABM_FABM11-llb-c-8); Perform operations involving simple cases with the use of the accounting equation (ABM_FABM11-Illb-c-9) S.Y. 2021-2022 ARISTOTLE PARMENIDES EPICURUS WEEK 4- LEARNING TASK 3 PAGE 21 Learning Task 3: The following transactions were made during the first month of a single proprietor's business operation. 1. Mr. Y started a grocery store. He invested P 200,00 as initial investment. 2. He registered his business paying P 1,500 for registration. 3. He paid P 20,000 for store rent applicable for one year. 4. He incurred and paid P25,000 for the repair of the grocery store. 5. He purchased merchandise for sale amounting to P 300,000, paying P 200,000 with the balance to be paid after 60 days. 6. He paid P2,000 for the transportation of the merchandise purchased. 7. He hired a saleslady for a contract of P 5,000 per month salary. 8. He sold P100,000 worth…arrow_forward
- Cashaun Wo x CCU brightspace.wiltech.edu/d2l/le/7659/discussions/topics/2429/View Subscribe New Wave Images is a graphics design firm that prepares its financial statements using a calendar year. Manny Kinn, the company treasurer and vice president of finance, has prepared a classified balance sheet as of December 31. In January, this balance sheet will be submitted along with an application for a loan from First Peoples Community Bank. An excerpt from the balance sheet follows: Cash $ 25,000 Accounts Receivable 85,000 Total Assets $ 250,000 The accounts receivable balance includes a $56,000 loan to Tom Morrow, the company president. Tom borrowed the money from New Wave 18 months earlier for a down payment on a new home. Tom has orally assured Manny that he will pay off the loan within the next year. Because Tom is the company president, Manny treats the amount due as a trade account receivable. In addition, Manny knows that the bank will consider a large balance in trade accounts…arrow_forwardA Final Exam - MATH 1330 - Math b Details | bartleby E New tab A https://www.webassign.net/web/Student/Assignment-Responses/submit?dep=254878928tags=autosave#question4023958_1 Sign in 12. DETAILS HARMATHAP12 6.2.009. MYΝΟΤΕS What are the future value and the interest earned if $4000 is invested for 3 years at 8% compounded quarterly? (Round your answers to the nearest cent.) future value 24 interest earned %24arrow_forward10:04 Assignment Details ATG-110-20A01: Financial Accounting (Session II Summer 2021) 7474 unread replies.7575 replies. Please read and respond to TIF 12-2 on page 623. Review the rubric to ensure you receive full points for this discussion. Discussion Rubric- 25 points(1)_(3).docx *After you have posted your answers, please reply to three other students' posts. This discussion board was set up so that you will not be able to see others replies until you post your own. Search entries or author Filter replies by unreadUnread Collapse replies TIF 12-2 Issuing Stock 1. ETHICS Lou Hoskins and Shirley Crothers are organizing Red Lodge Metals Unlimited Inc. to undertake a high-risk gold mining venture in Canada. Lou and Shirley tentatively plan to request authorization for 400,000,000 shares of common stock to be sold to the general public. Lou and Shirley have decided to establish par of $0.03 per share in order to appeal to a wide variety of potential investors. Lou and Shirley believe…arrow_forward
- How do i go about setting this up?arrow_forwardACCT2401Instructions for CompletingComprehensive ProblemThe comprehensive problem provides an illustration of the basic accounting cycle. Studentsmust complete the following items for the first month of operation (January) and the secondmonth of operations (February). Hint: Complete all items listed below (#1-#11) for Januaryprior to starting February.1. Record transactions with journal entries in the General Journal.2. Post journal entries to the General Ledger.3. Prepare the trial balance before adjustment (on the worksheet).4. Prepare the adjusting journal entries.5. Post the adjusting entries to the General Ledger.6. Prepare the adjusted trial balance (on the worksheet).7. Complete the worksheet.8. Prepare closing journal entries.9. Post the closing entries to the General Ledger.10. Prepare the post-closing trial balance.11. Prepare the following financial statements:arrow_forwardV Content Pearson (Assignments) - MA Ô https://www.mathxl.com/Student/PlayerTest.aspx?testld%3D225147196 3 103 Spring 2021 st: Test 2 (Finance) Online nis Question: 1 pt 5 of 19 (1 complete) ▼ How much must be deposited today into the following account in order to have a $135,000 college fund in 11 years? Assume no additional deposits are made. An account with quarterly compounding and an APR of 7.32% Sshould be deposited today. (Do not round until the final answer. Then round to the nearest cent as needed.)arrow_forward
arrow_back_ios
SEE MORE QUESTIONS
arrow_forward_ios
Recommended textbooks for you
- Cornerstones of Financial AccountingAccountingISBN:9781337690881Author:Jay Rich, Jeff JonesPublisher:Cengage LearningPrinciples of Accounting Volume 1AccountingISBN:9781947172685Author:OpenStaxPublisher:OpenStax College
- Accounting Information SystemsFinanceISBN:9781337552127Author:Ulric J. Gelinas, Richard B. Dull, Patrick Wheeler, Mary Callahan HillPublisher:Cengage Learning

Cornerstones of Financial Accounting
Accounting
ISBN:9781337690881
Author:Jay Rich, Jeff Jones
Publisher:Cengage Learning
Principles of Accounting Volume 1
Accounting
ISBN:9781947172685
Author:OpenStax
Publisher:OpenStax College

Accounting Information Systems
Finance
ISBN:9781337552127
Author:Ulric J. Gelinas, Richard B. Dull, Patrick Wheeler, Mary Callahan Hill
Publisher:Cengage Learning